Oil - Solid Controls PDF

Appendix A.
Conductance Calculation
Conductance is a measure of the ease with which fluid can flow throughout the screen per unit area. The conductance of square mesh or rectangular mesh screen cloth is calculated from the screens mesh count and wire diameter in both the warp and shute direction. Warp wires run lengthwise during the process of weaving the screen and are crossed at right angles by the shute wires. The shute wires are carried by the shuttle in the weaving process and may also be known as woof or weft wires. In the context of this discussion it is not important to distinguish which is warp and which is shute. However, it is important to be aware that there may be wires of two dimensions which should be considered separately in the equations. The equations are valid for most standard open-weave oilfield screens with the exception of some nonstandard polyester weaves and coated screen cloth. The conductance, C, in units of kilodarcies/millimeter for a standard weave screen cloth is computed by: 4095 E C = -----------------------2 A t where: The void fraction of the screen, E, is given by: 1 1 ------ ------- t ( V + V ) w s N s N w E = -----------------------------------------------------------1 1 ------ ------- t N s N w The screen thickness, t, in inches, is given by: t = ds + dw The length of the warp and shute wires lw, ls, in inches are calculated by: 1 2 ------ + d 2 s N s 1 2 ------- + d 2 w N w
2
lw =
ls =
A.1
Proprietary: - for the exclusive use of Chevron Corporatioin and other wholly owned subsidiaries of Chevron Corporation.
Solids Control Manual The volume of the warp and shute wires Vw, Vs, in inches,3 are computed by:
d w V w = ---------- lw 4
d s V s = --------- l s 4
The wire surface area to volume ratio, A, is computed by:
dw l w + d s l s A = -----------------------------------t -------------- N s N w
For screens composed of two or more layers, the conductances are calculated for each layer individually. The total conductance of the layered screen composition is then calculated by: 1 1 1 1 ----- = ------ + ------ + ------ + C1 C2 C 3 Ct
Nomenclature
A C = Wire surface area to mesh volume ratio, inch-1. = Conductance, kD/mm.
CT = Conductance of layered screen composition, kD/mm ds dw E ls lw Ns = Shute wire diameter, in. = Warp wire diameter, in. = Void fraction. = Length of shute wire, in. = Length of warp wire, in. = Mesh count in shute direction, wires per in.
Nw = Mesh count in warp direction, wires per in. t Vs = Screen thickness, in. = Volume of shute wire, in.3.
A.2
Appendix B. Solids Control Equipment Discharge Analysis, Oil-Based Muds
Analysis of the solids control equipment discharge provides valuable information about equipment performance and identifies the composition and rate of the discharge stream. These calculations are designed for oil-based muds, but can be used for water-based fluids as well.
Sample Collection
For shale shakers, a box will be needed to collect the discharge from the entire width of the shaker screens. A wooden core box can be used, or have a box fabricated. For mud cleaners, hydrocyclones or centrifuges, a 5 gallon bucket may be used. The larger the sample collected, the more accurate the results. 1. Weigh the sample container before collecting the sample. 2. Measure the sample collection time. 3. Record the weight of the container and wet solids. 4. Calculate the mass flow rate of the wet solids, mws, in lbm/min.
Retort Procedure
1. Weigh the empty retort W1, gm.: 2. Fill with a representative sample of wet solids and weight, W2, gm. 3. Run retort. Weigh retort and dry cuttings, W3, gm. 4. Record Volume of oil, Vo, and Volume of water, Vw, recovered. 5. Weight of wet solids, gm: W ws = W2 - W1 6. Density of wet solids:
B.1
Solids Control Manual
s = W ws/Vt
7. Weight of dry solids (including salt), gm: W ds = W3 - W1
Alternate Retort Procedure for Air-Entrained Cuttings Samples

Occasionally, there will not be sufficient liquid on the wet solids to avoid entrainment of air in the retort. This will cause errors in the retort calculations. The following procedure may be used if a problem with air entrainment is anticipated: 1. Place the retort cup lid on the retort cup. Place entire assembly on a balance. Record the weight of retort cup, lid, expansion chamber and steel wool as W1, gm. 2. Fill the cup approximately 3/4 full with wet cuttings. Weigh the wet cuttings, retort cup, lid, expansion chamber and steel wool. Record as W2, gm. 3. With a syringe, fill the retort cup with oil until the cuttings are covered. Carefully stir cuttings to remove entrapped air. 4. Place the lid on retort cup. Using the syringe and needle, fill retort cup with oil through the hole in the cup lid. 5. Weigh the wet cuttings/oil mixture, retort cup, lid, expansion chamber and steel wool. Record as W3. 6. Run retort. Record Volume of oil, Vto, and Volume of water, Vw, recovered. 7. Allow retort to cool. Weigh dry solids, retort cup, lid, expansion chamber and steel wool. Record as W4. 8. Weight of wet solids, gm: W ws = W2 - W1
9. Weight of dry solids (including salt), gm: W ds = W4 - W1
10. Volume of oil added by syringe, cm3:

B.2
Solids Control Equipment Discharge
Voa
= (W3 - W2)/SGoil
11. Corrected oil on cuttings Volume, cm3: Vo = Vto - Voa
12. Corrected retort Volume, cm3: Vt = 50 ml - Voa
Solids Analysis Calculations

Note: Use brine density, b, and Wt% salt, %S, recorded on mud check. 1. Density of wet solids:
ws
= W ws /Vt
2. Weight of oil, gm: Wo = Vo * SGoil
3. Volume of brine, cm3: Vb = 100 (Vw)/(b(100 - %S))
4. Corrected dry solids Volume, cm3: Vs = (Vt - Vo - Vb)
5. Corrected dry solids weight, gm: Ws = (Wws - Wo - (Vb * b)
6. Dry solids density, gm/cm3:
= W s/Vs
7. Corrected Volume% solids: %Vs = 100 * Vs/Vt
8. Volume% high-density solids (% of wet slurry):

B.3
Solids Control Manual %HDS = %Vs (s - 2.65) / (SGHDS - 2.65) 9. Volume% low-density solids (% of wet slurry): %LDS = %Vs - %HDS 10. High-density solids concentration, lb/bbl: HDS = 3.5 (SGHDS) (%HDS)
11. Low-density solids concentration, lb/bbl: LGS = 3.5 (SGLGS) (%LGS)
12. Weight% oil to dry solids: %Oil = (Wo/Ws) * 100
13. Total discharge rate, bbl/hr: Qt = (60) (ms)/((350) (ws))
14. Solid discharge rate, bbl/hr: Qs = (%Vs) (Qt)/100
15. Liquid discharge rate, bbl/hr: Ql = Q t - Qs
16. High-density solids mass flow rate, lb/hr: mHDS = (Qt) (HDS) 17. Low-density solids mass flow rate, lb/hr: mLDS = (Qt) (LDS) 18. Check HDS/LDS ratio of discharge to HDS/LDS ratio of mud If HDS/LDS > HDS/LDS of mud, then barite is being preferentially removed.
B.4
Example Calculations
The following example calculations are designed to show how the equations listed in this section may be used to determine the composition and rate of the solid and liquid discharge streams. Sample Source: Shaker discharge Mud Check Data Brine phase density, gm/cm3 Wt% Salt in Brine Barite, lb/bbl Low Gravity Solids, lb/bbl Drilled Solids Specific Gravity Barite Specific Gravity Sample Data Net Sample Weight, lb Sampling time, min Mass flow rate, lb/min Retort Data Weight of empty retort, gm Weight of retort and wet solids, gm Weight of retort and dry solids, gm Volume of oil recovered, cm3 Volume of water recovered, cm3 Total Volume retorted, cm3 W1 W2 W3 Vo Vw Vt 297.0 391.5 378.0 17.0 6.0 50.0 mws 60.0 1.0 60.0 Symbol
b
%S HDS LDS SGLGS SGHDS
1.24 26.7 100.0 75.0 2.65 4.2
B.5
Calculations
1. Weight of wet solids: W ws = W2 - W1 = 391.5 - 297 = 94.5 gm 2. Density of wet solids:
ws
= Wws / Vt = 94.5 / 50.0 = 1.89 gm/cm3
3. Weight of dry solids (including salt), gm: W ds = W3 - W1 = 378 - 297 = 81 gm 4. Weight of oil, gm: Wo = Vo * SGoil = (17) (0.84) = 14.28 gm 5. Volume of brine, cm3: Vb = 100 (Vw)/(b(100 - %S)) = (100) (6)/(1.24 (100 - 26.7)) = 6.6 cm3 6. Corrected dry solids volume, cm3: Vs = (Vt - Vo - Vb) = 50 - 17 - 6.6 = 26.4 cm3 7. Corrected dry solids weight, gm: Ws = (Wws - Wo - (Vb * b) = 94.5 - 14.3 - (6.6) (1.24) = 72.0 gm 8. Dry solids density, gm/cm3:
= Ws/Vs = 72.0/26.4 = 2.73 gm/cm3
9. Corrected Volume% solids:

B.6
%Vs
= 100 * Vs / Vt = (100) (26.4) / (50) = 52.8%
10. Volume% high-density solids (% of wet slurry): %HDS = %Vs (s - 2.65) / (HDS - 2.65) = 52.8 (2.73 - 2.65) / (4.2 - 2.65) = 2.73% 11. Volume% low-density solids (% of wet slurry): %LDS = %Vs - %HDS = 52.8 - 2.73 = 50.07% 12. High-density solids concentration, lb/bbl: HDSdis = 3.5 (HDS) (%HDS) = 3.5 (4.2) (2.73) = 40 lb/bbl 13. Low-density solids concentration, lb/bbl: LGSdis = 3.5 (SGLGS) (%LGS) = 3.5 (2.65) (50.07) = 464 lb/bbl 14. Weight% oil to dry solids: %Oil = (Wo/Ws) * 100
= (14.28 / 72.04) (100) = 19.8% 15. Total discharge rate, bbl/hr: Qt = (60) (ms) / ((350) (ws)) = (60) (60) / ((350) (1.89) = 5.44 bbl/hr 16. Solid discharge rate, bbl/hr: Qs = (%Vs) (Qt) / 100 = (52.8) (5.44) / 100 = 2.87 bbl/hr 17. Liquid discharge rate, bbl/hr: Ql = Q t - Qs = 5.44 - 2.87 = 2.57 bbl/hr 18. High-density solids mass flow rate, lb/hr:
B.7
mHDS = (Qt) (HDS) = (5.44) (40) = 216 lb/hr 19. Low-density solids mass flow rate, lb/hr: mLDS = (Qt) (LDS) = (5.44) (464) = 2523 lb/hr 20. Check HDS/LDS ratio of discharge to HDS/LDS ratio of mud Discharge HDS/LDS / Mud HDS/LDS (40/464) / (100/75) = 0.06 Since ratio is << 1.0, shaker is not preferentially removing barite.
B.8
Appendix D. Screen Designations

Brandt - ATL-1000, ATL CS (Main Deck)
SCREEN SERIES: Description: BHX Hexagonal opening pattern perf plate bonded to rigid frame. Triple layer, square mesh screen cloth similar to Derrick DX series. Brandt (original equipment manufacturer) Advanced Southwestern Repairable Scalping Screens for ATL-1000 shaker: -S8L, S12L, S20L,B20L(8X20),B40L(20X30).
Sources
Comments:
Brandt BHX Series

Screen Name
BHX 24 BHX 38 BHX 50 BHX 70 BHX 84 BHX 110 BHX 140 BHX 175 BHX 210 BHX 250
U.S. Sieve
28 36 47 68 79 100 118 152 158 213
Separation Potential D50

625 494 327 219 181 149 127 98 82 69
Flow Capacity Cond.

34.11 22.45 8.85 4.89 3.79 3.11 1.94 1.95 1.71 1.37
D16
435 360 231 158 127 105 95 70 58 49
D84
760 572 349 252 218 184 147 118 100 81
Area
7.28 7.28 7.28 7.28 7.28 7.28 7.28 6.76 6.76 6.76
Aspect Ratio
1.49 1.40 1.43 1.39 1.46 1.44 1.39 1.45 1.41 1.43
Trans .
248.3 163.4 64.4 35.6 27.5 22.6 14.1 13.2 11.5 9.3
C. 1
Proprietary: - for the exclusive use of Chevron Corporation and other wholly owned subsidiaries of Chevron Corporation.
Solids Control Manual Advanced BHX Replacement Series

Screen Name
BHX 50 BHX 70 BHX 84 BHX 110 BHX 140 BHX 175 BHX 210 BHX 250
U.S. Sieve
47 64 79 99 127 158 185 205

324 234 181 151 118 95 81 72
Flow Capacity Cond.

6.77 4.73 3.62 3.00 2.33 1.87 1.67 1.49
D16
234 171 131 107 86 66 57 51
D84
390 274 223 185 143 113 100 85
Area
6.01 6.01 6.01 6.01 6.01 6.01 6.01 6.01
Aspect Ratio
1.45 1.39 1.48 1.46 1.45 1.46 1.47 1.42
Trans .
40.7 28.4 21.7 18.0 14.0 11.2 10.0 8.9
Southwestern BHX Replacement Series

Screen Name
BHX 38 BHX 50 BHX 84 BHX 110 BHX 140 BHX 210 BHX 250
U.S. Sieve
38 48 86 97 118 174 215

440 320 169 153 127 86 68
Flow Capacity Cond.

11.86 6.77 3.09 2.89 2.32 1.67 1.23
D16
313 234 119 107 91 60 48
D84
537 380 200 182 153 106 82
Area
6.01 6.01 6.01 6.01 6.01 6.01 6.01
Aspect Ratio
1.45 1.45 1.44 1.46 1.41 1.41 1.45
Trans .
71.3 40.7 18.6 17.4 13.9 10.0 7.4
- C-2 Proprietary: - for the exclusive use of Chevron Corporation and other wholly owned subsidiaries of Chevron Corporation.
Screen Designations
Brandt - Retrofit Tandem, ATL-CS (Scalping Deck)

SCREEN SERIES: Description: Sources: BXL Hookstrip, 2 in. plastic grid. Triple layer, square mesh cloth. Brandt (original equipment manufacturer) Advanced Southwestern Use coarser mesh on top deck. Check tension.
Comments: Brandt BXL Series

Screen Name
BXL 50 BXL 84 BLX 110 BXL 140 BXL 175 BXL 210 BXL 250
U.S. Sieve
na 70 82 116 144 158 203
Separation Potential Cond. D50

210 171 130 102 95 73
Area
16.4 16.4 16.4 16.4 16.4 16.4 16.4
D16
na 155 124 97 76 67 54
D84
8.50 240 195 150 121 111 83 4.58 3.57 2.73 2.24 2.23 1.56
Aspect Ratio
na 1.35 1.39 1.39 1.42 1.40 1.36
Trans .
139.4 75.1 58.5 44.7 36.7 36.6 25.6

SCREEN SERIES: Description: BLS Hookstrip unbonded panel. Plastic strips at contact with support ribs. Triple layer, extra-fine square mesh. Brandt Nonrepairable. Use coarser mesh on top deck. Good deblinding characteristics, short screen life.
Sources: Comments:
Brandt BLS Series

Screen Name
BLS 50 BLS 80 BLS 120 BLS 150 BLS 180
U.S. Sieve
43 67 78 113 136
Separation Potential Cond. D50

377 222 185 134 109
Area
17.74 17.74 17.74 17.74 17.74
D16
263 160 137 95 80
D84
427 251 214 150 122 7.31 3.53 2.70 1.77 1.37
Aspect Ratio
1.39 1.35 1.35 1.37 1.35
Trans.
129.6 62.7 47.9 31.4 24.4
Screen Designations

SCREEN SERIES: Description: Sources: S Hookstrip, unbonded. Single layer, market grade square mesh. Brandt Advanced Southwestern Heavy gauge wire, long screen life. Poor resistance to blinding. Use as scalping screen.
Comments:
Brandt S Series
Screen Name
S-8 S-10 S-12 S-14 S-16 S-18 S-20 S-30 S-40 S-50 S-60 S-80 S-100 S-120
U.S. Sieve
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 33 41 49 61 77 103 121

2464 1905 1533 1306 1130 979 864 561 402 305 245 188 146 124
Flow Capacity Cond.

74.06 49.68 34.97 29.22 24.30 19.30 15.93 8.32 4.89 2.88 2.40 1.91 1.44 1.24
D16
n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 548 389 298 239 181 141 121
D84
n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 578 411 313 252 194 152 126
Area
17.74 17.74 17.74 17.74 17.74 17.74 17.74 17.74 17.74 17.74 17.74 17.74 17.74 17.74
Aspect Ratio
n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 1.05 1.05 1.07 1.04 1.06 1.11 1.04
Trans.
1313.8 881.34 620.30 518.31 431.12 342.41 282.62 147.59 86.79 51.01 42.51 33.93 25.51 22.07

SCREEN SERIES: Description: Sources: Comments: HCR Hookstrip, 2 in. plastic grid Proprietary weave, openings are long narrow slots. Cagle (built by Advanced) High conductance, extremely long life. Cut point will depend on shape of solids. - near minimum listed D50 for sands. - near maximum listed D50 for slivers.
Brandt
Screen Name
HCR 80 HCR 100 HCR 150 HCR 200 HCR 250 HCR 325
Mesh Count
12 X 93 15 X 115 19 X 158 19 X 200 20 X 229 43 X 259
D50 Range
173-250 141-203 105-151 74-107 61-88 43-62
Conductance
7.06 5.58 4.45 3.32 2.50 1.51
Area
16.4 16.4 16.4 16.4 16.4 16.4
Aspect Ratio
10 10 10 14 17 20
Screen Designations
Broadbent - Tandem Master (Lower Deck)

SCREEN SERIES: Description: Sources: Comments: BL Hookstrip, perforated plate with 2 in. openings. Layered square mesh cloth composition. Broadbent Repairable Scalping screens (2 required): - BG10, BG16, BG20, BG24, BG38.
Broadbent BL Series
Screen Name
BL 60 BL 84 BL 120 BL 140 BL 175 BL 210 BL 250
U.S. Sieve
48 80 100 122 152 168 208

316 177 149 123 98 89 71
D16
238 120 104 87 69 62 50
D84
325 215 187 148 120 106 84
Flow Capacity Aspect Ratio Cond. Area

7.03 3.69 3.21 2.46 2.04 1.77 1.25 6.89 6.89 6.89 6.89 6.89 6.89 6.89 1.26 1.57 1.50 1.45 1.48 1.47 1.41
Trans .
48.44 25.42 22.12 16.95 14.06 12.20 8.61
Derrick - Flo-Line Cleaner, Cascade System, High G Dryer

SCREEN SERIES: Description: PMD DX, PMD HP Hookstrip panel with unique corrugated screening surface, valleys run parallel to flow. PMD DX - Layered extra-fine square mesh. PMD HP - Layered extra-fine rectangular mesh. Derrick This design offers larger screening area and higher throughput than flat panels; helps reduce mud losses along shaker rails.
Sources: Comments:
Derrick PMD DX Series

Screen Name
PMD DX 50 PMD DX 70 PMD DX 84 PMD DX 110 PMD DX 140 PMD DX 175 PMD DX 210 PMD DX 250
U.S. Sieve
48 68 78 100 125 156 174 213

318 220 181 149 120 96 86 69
Flow Capacity Cond.

6.10 4.18 3.53 2.93 2.29 1.77 1.59 1.39
D16
231 158 127 105 86 70 60 49
D84
389 269 218 184 143 118 104 84
Area
7.42 7.42 7.42 7.42 7.42 7.42 7.42 7.42
Aspect Ratio
1.45 1.47 1.46 1.44 1.45 1.45 1.41 1.45
Trans.
45.3 31.0 26.2 21.8 17.0 13.1 11.8 10.3
Derrick PMD HP Series

Screen Name
PMD HP 45 PMD HP 50 PMD HP 60 PMD HP 70 PMD HP 80 PMD HP 100 PMD HP 125 PMD HP 140
U.S. Sieve
44 50 57 71 77 105 121 147

362 299 263 208 186 143 124 101
Flow Capacity Cond.

9.51 8.20 6.78 4.81 3.93 3.20 2.59 2.24
D16
283 234 207 158 145 113 100 79
D84
388 313 278 221 192 154 133 113
Area
7.42 7.42 7.42 7.42 7.42 7.42 7.42 7.42
Aspect Ratio
2.02 1.92 2.06 1.92 1.88 1.96 1.88 1.98
Trans.
70.6 60.8 50.3 35.7 29.1 23.8 19.2 16.6
PMD HP 180 PMD HP 200

PMD HP 230 PMD HP 265 PMD HP 310 PMD HP 460
168 203
230 261 300 357
89 76
62 55 48 41
67 60
52 44 38 31
94 82
72 59 53 47
1.82 1.59
1.31 0.97 0.85 0.60
7.42 7.42
7.42 7.42 7.42 7.42
1.88 1.86
2.13 2.25 2.52 2.50
13.5 11.8
9.7 7.2 6.3 4.5
Screen Designations

SCREEN SERIES: Description: PWP DX Hookstrip panel, perforated plate with 1 in. openings. Two layers, extra-fine square mesh over square mesh backing cloth. Derrick (original equipment manufacturer) Advanced Southwestern Has been standard screen series for all Derrick shakers, slightly less capacity than newer HP series. This series is also available for Derrick Model 58 Flo-Line Cleaner (panel area = 7.57 sq ft).
Sources:
Comments:
Derrick PWP DX Series

Screen Name
PWP DX 50 PWP DX 70 PWP DX 84 PWP DX 110 PWP DX 140 PWP DX 175 PWP DX 210 PWP DX 250
U.S. Sieve
48 68 78 100 125 156 174 213

318 220 181 149 120 96 86 69
Flow Capacity Cond.

6.10 4.18 3.53 2.93 2.29 1.77 1.59 1.39
D16
231 158 127 105 86 70 60 49
D84
389 269 218 184 143 118 104 84
Area
5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30
Aspect Trans. Ratio

1.45 1.47 1.46 1.44 1.45 1.45 1.41 1.45 32.4 22.1 18.7 15.6 12.2 9.4 8.4 7.4
Advanced PWP DX Replacement Series

Screen Name
PWP DX 24 PWP DX 38 PWP DX 50 PWP DX 70 PWP DX 84 PWP DX 110 PWP DX 140 PWP DX 175 PWP DX 210 PWP DX 250
U.S. Sieve
25 39 47 64 79 99 127 158 185 205

715 429 324 234 181 151 118 95 81 72
D16
508 317 234 171 131 107 86 66 57 51
D84
824 528 390 274 223 185 143 113 100 85

20.69 11.86 6.77 4.73 3.62 3.00 2.33 1.87 1.67 1.49 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 1.42 1.47 1.45 1.39 1.48 1.46 1.45 1.46 1.47 1.42
Trans.
113.8 65.2 37.2 26.0 19.9 16.5 12.8 10.3 9.2 8.2
Solids Control Manual Southwestern PWP DX Replacement Series

Screen Name
U.S. Sieve
25 39 48 73 86 97 118 152 174 215

715 429 320 200 169 153 127 98 86 68
Flow Capacity Cond.

20.69 11.86 6.77 4.17 3.62 3.89 2.32 1.90 1.67 1.23
D16
508 317 234 150 119 107 91 70 60 48
D84
824 528 380 241 200 182 153 117 106 82
Area
5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50
Aspect Ratio
1.42 1.47 1.45 1.48 1.44 1.46 1.41 1.48 1.41 1.45
Trans.
113.8 65.2 37.2 22.9 19.9 15.9 12.7 10.5 9.2 6.8
Screen Designations

SCREEN SERIES: Description: PWP HP Hookstrip panel, perforated plate with 1 in. openings. Two layers, extra-fine rectangular mesh over square mesh backing cloth. Derrick (original equipment) Advanced Southwestern Standard screen series for all Derrick shakers, slightly higher capacity than older DX series. Also available for Derrick Model 58 Flo-Line Cleaner (panel area = 7.57 sq ft).
Sources:
Comments:
Derrick PWP HP Series

Screen Name
PWP HP 45 PWP HP 50 PWP HP 60 PWP HP 70 PWP HP 80 PWP HP 100 PWP HP 125 PWP HP 150 PWP HP 180 PWP HP 200 PWP HP 230 PWP HP 265 PWP HP 310 PWP HP 460
U.S. Sieve
44 50 57 71 77 105 121 147 168 203 230 261 300 357

362 299 263 208 186 143 124 101 89 76 62 55 48 41
Flow Capacity Cond.

9.51 8.20 6.78 4.81 3.93 3.20 2.59 2.24 1.82 1.59 1.31 0.97 0.85 0.60
D16
283 234 207 158 145 113 100 79 67 60 52 44 38 31
D84
388 313 278 221 192 154 133 113 94 82 72 59 53 47
Area
5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30
Aspect Ratio
2.02 1.92 2.06 1.92 1.88 1.96 1.88 1.98 1.88 1.86 2.13 2.25 2.52 2.50
Trans.
50.4 43.5 35.9 25.5 20.8 17.0 13.7 11.9 9.6 8.4 6.9 5.2 4.5 3.2
Solids Control Manual Advanced PWP HP Replacement Series

Screen Name
PWP HP 45 PWP HP 50 PWP HP 60 PWP HP 70 PWP HP 80 PWP HP 100 PWP HP 125 PWP HP 150 PWP HP 180 PWP HP 200 PWP HP 230 PWP HP 265 PWP HP 310
U.S. Sieve
47 61 62 71 77 105 121 147 168 203 230 261 300

353 274 240 208 186 143 124 101 89 76 62 55 48
Flow Capacity Cond.

9.81 7.56 5.75 5.02 4.08 3.44 2.63 2.28 1.91 1.67 1.35 1.00 0.87
D16
270 216 184 158 145 113 100 79 67 60 52 44 38
D84
379 301 267 221 192 154 133 113 94 82 72 59 53
Area
5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50
Aspect Ratio
1.87 1.79 2.10 1.96 1.95 1.96 1.88 1.98 1.88 1.86 2.13 2.25 2.52
Trans.
53.9 41.6 31.6 27.6 22.4 18.9 14.5 12.5 10.5 9.2 7.4 5.5 4.8
Southwestern PWP HP Replacement Series

Screen Name PWP HP 45
PWP HP 50 PWP HP 60 PWP HP 70 PWP HP 80 PWP HP 100 PWP HP 125 PWP HP 150 PWP HP 180 PWP HP 200 PWP HP 230 PWP HP 265
U.S. Sieve 44
50 57 71 77 105 121 147 168 203 230 261
Separation Potential D50 362

299 263 208 186 143 124 101 89 76 62 55
Flow Capacity Cond. 9.96

8.33 6.78 4.81 3.93 3.20 2.65 2.28 1.91 1.67 1.31 .088
D16 283
234 207 158 145 113 100 79 67 60 52 44
D84 388
313 278 221 192 154 133 113 94 82 72 59
Area 5.50
5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.50
Aspect Ratio 1.87

1.79 2.10 1.96 1.95 1.90 1.98 2.17 1.93 1.78 2.20 2.29
Trans. 54.8
45.8 37.9 26.5 21.6 17.6 14.6 12.5 10.53 9.2 7.2 4.8
Screen Designations

SCREEN SERIES: Description: GBG HP Hookstrip panel, no perforated plate. Fine, HP-type rectangular mesh expoxy-bonded at contact points to 8 mesh backing cloth. Derrick (original equipment manufacturer) Southwestern GBG design maximizes screening area, and flow capacity, but screen life is limited.
Sources: Comments:
Derrick GBG HP Series

Screen Name
GBG HP 25 GBG HP 30 GBG HP 35 GBG HP 40 GBH HP 45 GBG HP 50 GBG HP 60 GBG HP 70 GBG HP 80 GBG HP 100 GBG HP 125 GBG HP 150 GBG HP 180 GBG HP 200 GBG HP 230 GBG HP 265 GBG HP 310 GBG HP 460
U.S. Sieve
24 29 36 38 44 49 55 67 76 93 113 136 163 194 215 257 270 301

734 610 485 445 368 310 273 221 190 159 134 109 92 77 68 56 52 48
Flow Capacity Cond.

23.38 18.86 16.53 14.26 11.56 9.86 8.43 7.04 5.97 4.97 3.86 3.30 2.75 2.41 1.86 1.38 1.20 0.94
D16
622 527 430 400 340 304 250 214 184 141 127 106 90 74 63 54 51 45
D84
766 640 492 462 375 316 298 226 197 176 140 112 95 80 73 60 55 50
Area
6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84
Aspect Ratio
1.80 1.92 1.54 1.90 1.87 1.87 2.07 1.85 1.74 1.82 1.89 1.87 1.85 1.71 2.04 2.32 2.52 3.23
Trans.
159.9 129.0 113.1 97.5 79.1 67.4 57.7 48.2 40.8 32.8 26.4 22.6 18.8 16.5 12.7 9.4 8.2 6.4
Solids Control Manual Southwestern GBG HP Replacement Series

Screen Name
GBG HP 45 GBG HP 50 GBG HP 60 GBG HP 70 GBG HP 80 GBG HP 100 GBG HP 125 GBG HP 150 GBG HP 180 GBG HP 200 GBG HP 230 GBG HP 265
U.S. Sieve
44 49 55 67 76 93 113 136 163 194 215 257

368 310 273 221 190 159 134 109 92 77 68 56
Flow Capacity Cond.

11.66 9.93 8.48 7.08 5.99 4.81 3.87 3.30 2.76 2.41 1.87 1.38
D16
340 304 250 214 184 141 127 106 90 74 63 54
D84
375 316 298 226 197 176 140 112 95 80 73 60
Area
6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84
Aspect Ratio
1.87 1.87 2.07 1.85 1.74 1.82 1.89 1.87 1.85 1.71 2.04 2.32
Trans.
79.7 67.9 58.0 48.4 41.0 32.9 26.5 22.6 18.9 16.5 12.8 9.5
Screen Designations

SCREEN SERIES: Description: PBP HP Hookstrip panel, perforated plate with 1 in. openings. Single extra-fine rectangular mesh screening layer over square mesh backing cloth. Derrick Highest conductance of Derricks standard perforated plate panels. Shorter screen life than standard PWP series, but more resistant to plugging from sticky material such as gilsonite.
Sources: Comments:
Derrick PBP HP Series

Screen Name
PBP HP 60 PBP HP 70 PBP HP 80 PBP HP 100 PBP HP 125 PBP HP 150 PBP HP 180 PBP HP 200 PBP HP 230 PBP HP 265 PBP HP 310
U.S. Sieve
60 69 78 101 115 131 165 189 208 261 300

252 215 182 148 131 114 91 79 71 55 48
Flow Capacity Cond.

6.78 6.20 4.91 4.01 3.38 2.95 2.38 2.12 1.76 1.28 1.12
Aspect Ratio
1.92 1.76 1.73 1.76 1.79 2.11 1.80 1.66 2.08 2.25 2.52
D16
241 207 149 129 117 98 79 71 65 44 38
D84
263 223 189 157 137 118 94 83 75 59 53
Area
5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30
Trans .
35.9 32.9 26.0 21.3 17.9 15.6 12.6 11.2 9.3 6.8 6.0

SCREEN SERIES: Description: Sources: Comments: SWG DX Hookstrip panel, unbonded, layered, extra-fine square mesh cloth. Derrick (original equipment manufacturer) Southwestern Original layered screen series. Good deblinding characteristics. Screen life is poor.
Derrick SWG DX Series

Screen Name
SWG DX 50 SWG DX 70 SWG DX 84 SWG DX 110 SWG DX 140 SWG DX 175 SWG DX 210 SWG DX 250
U.S. Sieve
48 68 78 100 125 156 174 213

318 220 182 149 120 96 86 69
Flow Capacity Cond.

7.42 4.75 3.93 3.21 2.46 1.94 1.73 1.50
D16
231 158 129 105 86 70 60 49
D84
389 269 223 184 143 118 104 84
Area
7.60 7.60 7.60 7.60 7.60 7.60 7.60 7.60
Aspect Ratio
1.45 1.47 1.46 1.44 1.45 1.45 1.41 1.45
Trans .
56.4 36.1 29.9 24.4 18.7 14.8 13.1 11.4
Southwestern SWG DX Series

Screen Name
SWG DX 24 SWG DX 38 SWG DX 50 SWG DX 70 SWG DX 84 SWG DX 110 SWG DX 140 SWG DX 175 SWG DX 210 SWG DX 250
U.S. Sieve
25 39 48 73 86 97 118 152 174 215

715 429 320 200 169 153 127 98 86 68
Flow Capacity Cond.

14.82 8.46 7.11 4.59 3.93 3.09 2.44 1.98 1.73 1.26
D16
508 317 234 150 119 107 91 70 60 48
D84
824 528 380 241 200 182 153 117 106 82
Area
7.60 7.60 7.60 7.60 7.60 7.60 7.60 7.60 7.60 7.60
Aspect Ratio
1.44 1.55 1.45 1.47 1.46 1.44 1.45 1.45 1.41 1.45
Trans.
112.6 64.29 54.1 34.9 29.85 23.5 18.5 15.1 13.2 9.6
Screen Designations

SCREEN SERIES: Description: BXL-D Hookstrip perforated plate with hexagonal openings. Triple layer, extra-fine square mesh cloth, similar to PWP DX Brandt Replacement screen offered by Brandt.
Sources: Comments:
Brandt BXL-D Replacement Series

Screen Name
BHX-D24 BHX-D38 BHX-D50 BHX-D70 BHX-D84 BHX-D110 BHX-D140 BHX-D175 BHX-D210 BHX-D250
U.S. Sieve
28 36 47 68 79 100 118 152 158 213

625 494 327 219 181 149 127 98 95 69
Flow Capacity Cond.

34.11 22.45 8.85 4.89 3.78 3.11 2.97 1.95 1.81 1.44
D16
435 360 231 158 127 105 95 70 69 49
D84
760 572 349 252 218 184 147 118 109 81
Area
5.53 5.53 5.53 5.53 5.53 5.53 5.53 5.53 5.53 5.53
Aspect Ratio
1.49 1.40 1.43 1.39 1.46 1.44 1.39 1.45 1.41 1.43
Trans .
188.62 124.12 48.92 27.05 20.92 17.20 16.41 10.76 10.03 7.96

SCREEN SERIES: Description: Diamond Back, DX and HP type Hookstrip panel, perforated plate with triangular-shaped openings. HP Type - Two layers, extra-fine rectangular mesh over square mesh backing cloth. DX Type - Two layers, extra-fine square mesh over square mesh backing cloth. Advanced Diamond-shaped plate pattern offers slightly more usable screening area than standard 1 in. PWP-type square openings.
Sources:
Advanced Diamond Back DX Replacement Series

Screen Name
U.S. Sieve
25 39 47 64 79 99 127 158 185 205

715 429 324 234 181 151 118 95 81 72
D16
508 317 234 171 131 107 86 66 57 51
D84
824 528 390 274 223 185 143 113 100 85

20.69 11.86 6.77 4.73 3.62 3.00 2.33 1.87 1.67 1.49 5.70 5.70 5.70 5.70 5.70 5.70 5.70 5.70 5.70 5.70 1.42 1.47 1.45 1.39 1.48 1.46 1.45 1.46 1.47 1.42
Trans.
117.9 67.6 38.6 26.9 20.6 17.1 13.3 10.7 9.5 8.5
Screen Designations Advanced Diamond Back HP Replacement Series

Screen Name
PWP HP 45 PWP HP 50 PWP HP 60 PWP HP 70 PWP HP 80 PWP HP 100 PWP HP 125 PWP HP 150 PWP HP 180 PWP HP 200 PWP HP 230 PWP HP 265 PWP HP 310
U.S. Sieve
47 61 62 71 77 105 121 147 168 203 230 261 300

353 274 240 208 186 143 124 101 89 76 62 55 48
Flow Capacity Cond.

9.81 7.56 5.75 5.02 4.08 3.44 2.63 2.28 1.91 1.67 1.35 1.00 0.87
D16
270 216 184 158 145 113 100 79 67 60 52 44 38
D84
379 301 267 221 192 154 133 113 94 82 72 59 53
Area
5.70 5.70 5.70 5.70 5.70 5.70 5.70 5.70 5.70 5.70 5.70 5.70 5.70
Aspect Ratio
1.87 1.79 2.10 1.96 1.95 1.96 1.88 1.98 1.88 1.86 2.13 2.25 2.52
Trans.
1.87 1.79 2.10 1.96 1.95 1.96 1.88 1.98 1.88 1.86 2.13 2.25 2.52

SCREEN SERIES: Description: Sources: Comments: HCR Hookstrip, perforated plate with 1 in. openings. Proprietary weave, openings are long narrow slots. Cagle (built by Advanced) High conductance, extremely long life. Cut point will depend on shape of solids. - near minimum listed D50 for sands. - near maximum listed D50 for slivers.
Derrick
Screen Name
Mesh Count
12 X 93 15 X 115 19 X 158 19 X 200 20 X 229 43 X 259
D50 Range
173-250 141-203 105-151 74-107 61-88 43-62
Conductance
7.06 5.58 4.45 3.32 2.50 1.51
Area
5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
Aspect Ratio
10 10 10 14 17 20
Screen Designations

SCREEN SERIES: Description: HCS Hookstrip perforated plate with 1 in. openings. Single layer, extra-fine square mesh cloth over backing cloth. Cagle (built by Advanced) Derrick (designated PBP DX) High conductance series, less susceptible to plugging by asphaltenes than triple layer screens. Screen life averages 40% less than PWP DX type.
Sources: Comments:
Derrick
Screen Name
HCS 24 HCS 38 HCS 50 HCS 70 HCS 84 HCS 100 HCS 130 HCS 160 HCS 180 HCS 220 HCS 280 HCS 325
U.S. Sieve
25 34 44 57 64 76 100 124 135 176 228 282

715 522 367 266 234 189 149 121 110 85 63 51
Flow Capacity Cond.

20.69 14.46 9.56 6.75 5.90 4.61 3.62 3.21 3.05 1.90 1.17 0.76
D16
508 403 264 191 178 157 137 113 100 81 60 48
D84
824 558 426 275 243 197 151 123 115 88 65 53
Area
5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30 5.30
Aspect Ratio
1.42 1.29 1.41 1.29 1.29 1.22 1.14 1.12 1.16 1.10 1.09 1.09
Trans .
109.66 76.65 50.67 35.78 31.26 24.42 19.19 17.03 16.14 10.07 6.18 4.00
Fluid Systems - Model 500, Model 50

SCREEN SERIES: Description: MF Pretensioned, glued to rigid frame, 3 in. spacing between glue lines. Square mesh tensile bolting cloth over backing cloth. Fluid Systems (original equipment manufacturer) Southwestern Screens are not repairable. Standard screen series for Fluid Systems shaker.
Sources: Comments:
Fluid Systems MF Series

Screen Name
MF 10 MF 20 MF 28 MF 30 MF 40 MF 74 MF 100 MF 120 MF 145 MF 165 MF 180 MF 200
U.S. Sieve
11 20 24 26 37 61 75 100 126 137 156 172

1905 863 716 682 476 248 193 149 119 108 96 87
Flow Capacity Cond.

49.68 15.93 16.14 16.60 9.51 5.18 5.13 2.65 1.95 1.79 1.56 1.45
D16
na na na 671 465 241 186 129 109 99 93 82
D84
na na na 687 487 252 197 152 122 111 97 90
Area
6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61
Aspect Ratio
na na na 1.03 1.04 1.08 1.09 1.18 1.14 1.13 1.10 1.10
Trans.
328.4 105.3 106.7 109.7 62.9 34.2 33.9 17.5 12.90 11.85 10.34 9.61
Screen Designations Southwest Replacement Series

Screen Name
10 20 40 60 74 100 120 145 165 180 200
U.S. Sieve
11 20 41 61 61 75 100 126 137 156 172

1905 864 402 245 248 193 149 119 108 96 87
Flow Capacity Cond.

49.68 15.93 6.09 2.32 5.18 5.13 2.65 1.95 1.79 1.56 1.45
D16
na na 389 239 241 186 129 109 99 93 82
D84
na na 411 252 252 197 152 122 111 97 90
Area
7.10 7.10 7.10 7.10 7.10 7.10 7.10 7.10 7.10 7.10 7.10
Aspect Ratio
na na 1.05 1.04 1.08 1.09 1.18 1.14 1.13 1.10 1.10
Trans .
352.7 113.1 43.2 16.5 36.8 36.4 18.8 13.8 12.7 11.1 10.3

SCREEN SERIES: Description: HCS Pretensioned, glued to rigid frame, 3 in. spacing between glue lines. Single layer, extra-fine square mesh over backing cloth. Fluid Systems Screens are not repairable. High conductance series, shorter screen life than MF series.
Sources: Comments:
Fluid Systems HCS Series

Screen Name
HCS 38 HCS 50 HCS 70 HCS 84 HCS 130 HCS 160 HCS 180 HCS 220 HCS 280 HCS 325
U.S. Sieve
34 44 57 64 100 124 135 176 228 282

522 367 266 234 149 121 110 85 63 51
D16
403 264 191 178 137 113 100 81 60 48
D84
558 426 275 243 151 123 115 88 65 53

19.08 9.60 7.93 6.78 3.92 3.45 3.25 1.98 1.20 0.77 6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61 1.29 1.41 1.29 1.29 1.14 1.12 1.16 1.10 1.09 1.09
Trans .
126.1 63.5 52.4 44.8 25.9 22.8 21.5 13.1 7.9 5.1
Screen Designations

SCREEN SERIES: Description: XS Pretensioned, glued to rigid frame, 3 in. spacing between glue lines. Single layer, synthetic mesh over steel wire backing cloth. Fluid Systems Screens are not repairable. Conductance is generally low in this series.
Sources: Comments:
Fluid Systems XS Series

Screen Name
XS 40 XS 60 XS 80 XS 100 XS 120 XS 150 XS 180 XS 250 XS 325
U.S. Sieve
44 60 84 100 114 158 174 294 346

429 250 171 149 132 95 86 49 42
Flow Capacity Cond.

7.21 4.14 3.02 2.82 2.16 1.93 1.38 0.58 0.50
D16
356 242 167 125 128 91 82 48 41
D84
439 255 175 152 135 98 89 51 43
Area
6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61 6.61
Aspect Ratio
1.17 1.09 1.07 1.17 1.04 1.12 1.06 1.11 1.09
Trans .
47.7 27.4 19.9 18.6 14.3 12.7 9.1 3.8 3.3

SCREEN SERIES: Description: PTP, DX, PTP, HP Perforated plate with 1 in. openings bonded to rigid frame. PTP DX - Two layers, extra-fine rectangular mesh over backing cloth. Advanced Repairable
Sources: Comments:
Advanced PTP DX Replacement Series

Screen Name
PTP DX 50 PTP DX 70 PTP DX 84 PTP DX 110 PTP DX 140 PTP DX 175 PTP DX 210 PTP DX 250
U.S. Sieve
47 64 79 99 127 158 185 205

324 234 181 151 118 95 81 72
Flow Capacity Cond.

6.77 4.73 3.62 3.00 2.33 1.87 1.67 1.49
D16
234 171 131 107 86 66 57 51
D84
390 274 223 185 143 113 100 85
Area
5.34 5.34 5.34 5.34 5.34 5.34 5.34 5.34
Aspect Ratio
1.45 1.39 1.48 1.46 1.45 1.46 1.47 1.42
Trans .
36.1 25.2 19.3 16.0 12.5 10.0 8.9 7.9
Advanced PTP DX Replacement Series

Screen Name
PTP HP 45 PTP HP 50 PTP HP 60 PTP HP 70 PTP HP 80 PTP HP 100 PTP HP 125 PTP HP 140 PTP HP 180 PTP HP 200 PTP HP 230 PTP HP 265 PTP HP 310
U.S. Sieve
47 61 62 71 77 105 121 147 168 203 230 261 300

353 274 240 208 186 143 124 101 89 76 62 55 48
Flow Capacity Cond.

9.81 7.56 5.75 5.02 4.08 3.44 2.63 2.28 1.91 1.67 1.35 1.00 0.87
D16
270 216 184 158 145 113 100 79 67 60 52 44 38
D84
379 301 267 221 192 154 133 113 94 82 72 59 53
Area
5.34 5.34 5.34 5.34 5.34 5.34 5.34 5.34 5.34 5.34 5.34 5.34 5.34
Aspect Ratio
1.87 1.79 2.10 1.96 1.95 1.96 1.88 1.98 1.88 1.86 2.13 2.25 2.52
Trans .
52.4 40.3 30.7 26.8 21.8 18.4 14.1 12.2 10.2 8.9 7.2 5.3 4.6
Screen Designations
Harrisburg - Linear Tandem

SCREEN SERIES: Description: Sources: Comments: Harrisburg Series
Screen Name
24 38 50 70 84 110 140 175 210
Harrisburg Hookstrip, 2 in. plastic grid. Triple layer, square mesh cloth. Harrisburg Use coarser mesh on top deck. Monitor tension for maximum screen life.
U.S. Sieve
23 30 42 58 56 113 132 152 158

625 494 386 258 260 134 113 98 95
Flow Capacity Cond.

34.11 10.00 8.07 6.15 5.44 3.00 2.38 1.90 1.67
D16
435 360 286 252 251 97 77 70 69
D84
760 572 406 263 267 166 138 118 109
Area
8.20 8.20 8.20 8.20 8.20 8.20 8.20 8.20 8.20
Aspect Ratio
1.49 1.40 1.29 1.04 1.05 1.50 1.54 1.45 1.41
Trans.
279.7 82.0 66.2 50.5 44.6 18.0 14.3 11.4 10.0
Swaco - ALS
SCREEN SERIES: Description: Sources: Comments: Swaco XL Series
Screen Name
XL 50 XL 70 XL 84 XL 110 XL 140 XL 175 XL 210 XL 250
XL Hookstrip, 2 in. plastic grid. Triple layer, square mesh cloth. Swaco (Southwestern) Advanced Monitor screen tension for maximum screen life.
U.S. Sieve
48 73 86 97 118 152 174 215

320 200 169 153 127 98 86 68
Flow Capacity Cond.

6.17 3.76 3.44 2.75 2.14 1.78 1.63 1.21
D16
234 150 119 107 91 70 60 48
D84
380 241 200 182 153 117 106 82
Area
9.40 9.40 9.40 9.40 9.40 9.40 9.40 9.40
Aspect Ratio
1.45 1.48 1.44 1.46 1.41 1.48 1.41 1.45
Trans.
58.0 35.4 32.3 25.9 20.1 16.8 15.3 11.4
Advanced DX 2 in. Plastic Replacement Series

Screen Name
DX 50 DX 70 DX 84 DX 110 DX 140 DX 175 DX 210 DX 250
U.S. Sieve
47 64 79 99 127 158 185 205

324 234 181 151 118 95 81 72
Flow Capacity Cond.

6.77 4.73 3.65 3.00 2.33 1.87 1.67 1.49
D16
234 171 131 107 86 66 57 51
D84
390 274 223 185 143 113 100 85
Area
9.74 9.74 9.74 9.74 9.74 9.74 9.74 9.74
Aspect Ratio
1.45 1.39 1.48 1.46 1.45 1.46 1.47 1.42
Trans.
65.9 46.0 35.2 29.2 22.7 18.2 16.3 14.5
Screen Designations
Swaco - ALS
SCREEN SERIES: Description: Sources: Comments: ALS Hookstrip, unbonded, plastic strips at support rails. Triple layer, square mesh cloth. Swaco Higher capacity, good deblinding characteristics but shorter life than XL series. Monitor screen tension for maximum screen life.
Swaco ALS Series

Screen Name
ALS 50 ALS 70 ALS 84 ALS 110 ALS 140 ALS 175 ALS 210 ALS 250
U.S. Sieve
48 73 86 97 118 152 174 215

320 200 169 153 127 98 86 68
Flow Capacity Cond.

6.17 3.76 3.44 2.75 2.14 1.78 1.63 1.21
D16
234 150 119 107 91 70 60 48
D84
380 241 200 182 153 117 106 82
Area
11.75 11.75 11.75 11.75 11.75 11.75 11.75 11.75
Aspect Ratio
1.45 1.48 1.44 1.46 1.41 1.48 1.41 1.45
Trans .
72.5 44.2 40.4 32.3 25.2 21.0 19.2 14.2
Swaco - ALS
SCREEN SERIES: Description: Sources: Comments: HCR Hookstrip, 2 in. plastic grid. Proprietary weave, openings are long narrow slots. Cagle (built by Advanced) High conductance, extremely long life. Cut point will depend on shape of solids. - near minimum listed D50 for sands. - near maximum listed for D50 for slivers.
Swaco
Screen Name
Mesh Count
12 X 93 15 X 115 19 X 158 19 X 200 20 X 229 43 X 259
D50 Range
173-250 141-203 105-151 74-107 61-88 43-62
Conductance
7.06 5.58 4.45 3.32 2.50 1.51
Area
9.4 9.4 9.4 9.4 9.4 9.4
Aspect Ratio
10 10 10 14 17 20
Screen Designations
Swaco - ALS
SCREEN SERIES: Description: Advanced DX Replacement Series Hookstrip, perforated plate with 1 in. openings. Two layers, extra-fine square mesh over square mesh backing cloth. Advanced Check support stringers carefully to ensure full contact.
Sources: Comments:
Advanced DX 1 in. Metal Replacement Series

Screen Name
DX 50 DX 70 DX 84 DX 110 DX 140 DX 175 DX 210 DX 250
U.S. Sieve
47 64 79 99 127 158 185 205

324 234 181 151 118 95 81 72
Flow Capacity Cond.

6.77 4.73 3.65 3.00 2.33 1.87 1.67 1.49
D16
234 171 131 107 86 66 57 51
D84
390 274 223 185 143 113 100 85
Area
9.88 9.88 9.88 9.88 9.88 9.88 9.88 9.88
Aspect Ratio
1.45 1.39 1.48 1.46 1.45 1.46 1.47 1.42
Trans.
66.8 46.7 35.7 29.6 23.1 18.2 16.3 14.7
Sweco - LM-3
SCREEN SERIES: Description: TBC Hookstrip, perforated plate, available with 1 in. or 2 in. openings. Tensile bolting cloth over coarse backing cloth. Sweco (original equipment manufacturer) Southwestern Use 1 in. perf plate as feed end panel and under heavier solids loading applications.
Sources: Comments:
Sweco TBC 1 in. Series

Screen Name
TBC 30 TBC 40 TBC 50 TBC 60 TBC 70 TBC 80 TBC 94 TBC 105 TBC 120 TBC 145 TBC 165 TBC 200 TBC 230
U.S. Sieve
26 37 41 49 57 66 78 94 102 122 133 168 193

682 476 400 318 266 228 185 158 147 123 112 89 75
Flow Capacity Cond.

24.33 11.63 8.45 6.58 6.10 4.34 3.07 3.00 2.68 2.14 1.95 1.56 1.34
D16
671 465 381 306 261 222 181 154 144 118 108 86 73
D84
687 487 417 330 272 231 188 162 150 126 115 92 77
Area
6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60
Aspect Ratio
1.03 1.04 1.08 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.03 1.08 1.03 1.07 1.04 1.05 1.04
Trans.
160.6 76.7 55.8 43.4 40.3 28.6 20.3 19.8 17.7 14.1 12.9 10.3 8.8
Screen Designations Sweco TBC 2 in. Series

Screen Name
U.S. Sieve
26 37 41 49 57 66 78 94 102 122 133 168 193

682 476 400 318 266 228 185 158 147 123 112 89 75
Flow Capacity Cond.

24.33 11.63 8.45 6.58 6.10 4.34 3.07 3.00 2.68 2.14 1.95 1.56 1.34
D16
671 465 381 306 261 222 181 154 144 118 108 86 73
D84
687 487 417 330 272 231 188 162 150 126 115 92 77
Area
7.16 7.16 7.16 7.16 7.16 7.16 7.16 7.16 7.16 7.16 7.16 7.16 7.16
Aspect Ratio
1.03 1.04 1.08 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.03 1.08 1.03 1.07 1.04 1.05 1.04
Trans.
174.2 83.3 60.5 47.1 43.7 31.1 22.0 21.5 19.2 15.3 13.9 11.2 9.6
Southwestern 1 in. TBC Replacement Series

Screen Name
U.S. Sieve
26 37 41 49 57 66 78 94 102 122 133 168 193

682 476 400 318 266 228 185 158 147 123 112 89 75
Flow Capacity Cond.

24.33 11.63 8.45 6.58 6.10 4.34 3.07 3.00 2.68 2.14 1.95 1.56 1.34
D16
671 465 381 306 261 222 181 154 144 118 108 86 73
D84
687 487 417 330 272 231 188 162 150 126 115 92 77
Area
6.81 6.81 6.81 6.81 6.81 6.81 6.81 6.81 6.81 6.81 6.81 6.81 6.81
Aspect Ratio
1.03 1.04 1.08 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.03 1.08 1.03 1.07 1.04 1.05 1.04
Trans .
122.6 67.8 68.5 44.8 41.5 29.5 20.9 20.4 18.3 14.6 13.3 10.6 9.1
Solids Control Manual Southwestern TBC 2 in. Replacement Series

Screen Name
U.S. Sieve
26 37 41 49 57 66 78 94 102 122 133 168 193

682 476 400 318 266 228 185 158 147 123 112 89 75
Flow Capacity Cond.

24.33 11.63 8.45 6.58 6.10 4.34 3.07 3.00 2.68 2.14 1.95 1.56 1.34
D16
671 465 381 306 261 222 181 154 144 118 108 86 73
D84
687 487 417 330 272 231 188 162 150 126 115 92 77
Area
7.68 7.68 7.68 7.68 7.68 7.68 7.68 7.68 7.68 7.68 7.68 7.68 7.68
Aspect Ratio
1.03 1.04 1.08 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.03 1.08 1.03 1.07 1.04 1.05 1.04
Trans .
186.9 89.4 64.9 50.5 46.9 33.3 23.6 23.0 20.6 16.5 15.0 12.0 10.3
Screen Designations
Sweco - LM-3
SCREEN SERIES: Description: MG Hookstrip, perforated plate, available with 1 in. or 2 in. openings. Market grade cloth over coarse backing cloth. Southwestern TBC panels preferred except for extreme conditions. Use 1 in. perf plate as feed end panel and under heavier solids loading applications.
Sources: Comments:
Southwestern 1 in. MG Replacement Series

Screen Name
MG 30 MG 40 MG 50 MG 60 MG 80 MG 100 MG 120 MG 150 MG 200 MG 250 MG 325
U.S. Sieve
33 41 49 61 77 103 121 138 198 230 325

561 402 305 245 188 146 124 107 75 62 44
Flow Capacity Cond.

9.10 6.09 3.23 2.32 1.86 1.69 1.22 1.36 0.86 0.77 0.43
D16
548 389 298 239 181 141 121 102 73 61 38
D84
578 411 313 252 194 152 126 110 78 63 47
Area
6.81 6.81 6.81 6.81 6.81 6.81 6.81 6.81 6.81 6.81 6.81
Aspect Ratio
1.05 1.05 1.07 1.04 1.06 1.11 1.04 1.07 1.04 1.07 1.14
Trans .
42.9 31.1 18.8 15.8 12.7 9.6 8.3 9.3 5.8 5.3 2.9
Southwestern MG 2 in. Replacement Series

Screen Name
MG 30 MG 40 MG 50 MG 60 MG 80 MG 100 MG 120 MG 150 MG 200 MG 250 MG 325
U.S. Sieve
33 41 49 61 77 103 121 138 198 230 325

561 402 305 245 188 146 124 107 75 62 44
Flow Capacity Cond.

9.10 6.09 3.23 2.32 1.86 1.69 1.22 1.36 0.86 0.77 0.43
D16
548 389 298 239 181 141 121 102 73 61 38
D84
578 411 313 252 194 152 126 110 78 63 47
Area
7.68 7.68 7.68 7.68 7.68 7.68 7.68 7.68 7.68 7.68 7.68
Aspect Ratio
1.05 1.05 1.07 1.04 1.06 1.11 1.04 1.07 1.04 1.07 1.14
Trans .
69.9 46.8 24.8 17.7 14.3 13.0 9.4 10.4 6.6 5.9 3.3
Sweco - LM-3
SCREEN SERIES: Description: Sources: Comments: DX-Type Hookstrip, perforated plate with 1 in. openings. Two layers, extra-fine mesh over coarse backing cloth. Advanced May provide better resistance to blinding in some applications. Usable screening area, flow capacity is better than 1 in. TBC panel.
Advanced DX 1 in. Replacement Series

Screen Name
DX 38 DX 50 DX 70 DX 84 DX 110 DX 140 DX 175 DX 210 DX 250
U.S. Sieve
39 47 64 79 99 127 158 185 205

429 324 234 181 151 118 95 81 72
Flow Capacity Cond.

11.86 6.77 4.73 3.62 3.00 2.38 1.86 1.67 1.45
D16
317 234 171 131 107 86 66 57 51
D84
528 390 274 223 185 143 113 100 85
Area
7.7 7.7 7.7 7.7 7.7 7.7 7.7 7.7 7.7
Aspect Ratio
1.47 1.45 1.39 1.48 1.46 1.45 1.46 1.47 1.42
Trans .
91.32 52.09 36.39 27.84 23.08 18.33 14.35 12.82 11.17
Screen Designations
Sweco - LF-3
SCREEN SERIES: Description: CTB Perforated plate with 1 in. openings bonded to a rigid frame. Tensile bolting cloth over coarse backing cloth. Sweco (built by Advanced) One of two screen types available for this shaker. The CTB series should provide longer life than CHC, at lower throughput.
Sources: Comments:
Advanced CTB Series

Screen Name
CTB 20 CTB 30 CTB 40 CTB 70 CTB 120 CTB 145 CTB 165 CTB 200
U.S. Sieve
18 26 37 57 102 122 133 168

1041 682 476 266 147 123 112 89 671 465 261 144 118 108 86 687 487 272 150 126 115 92
Flow Capacity Cond.

40.93 18.00 9.96 6.10 2.68 2.14 1.95 1.56
D16
D84
Area
7.54 7.54 7.54 7.54 7.54 7.54 7.54 7.54
Aspect Ratio
Trans .
308.6
1.03 1.04 1.05 1.03 1.07 1.04 1.05
135.7 75.1 46.0 20.2 16.2 14.7 11.7
Sweco - LF-3
SCREEN SERIES: Description: CHC Perforated plate with 1 in. openings bonded to a rigid frame. Two layers, extra-fine rectangular mesh over coarse mesh backing cloth. Advanced High capacity screening option for LF-3 shaker.
Sources: Comments:
Advanced CHC Series

Screen Name
CHC 24 CHC 38 CHC 45 CHC 60 CHC 80 CHC 110 CHC 125 CHC 150 CHC 180 CHC 210 CHC 230
U.S. Sieve
25 39 47 62 77 99 127 161 189 185 239

715 429 353 240 186 151 120 107 85 81 60
Flow Capacity Cond.

20.69 11.86 9.81 5.75 4.08 3.00 2.53 2.15 1.83 1.55 1.27
D16
508 317 270 184 145 107 92 78 62 57 47
D84
824 528 379 267 192 185 131 117 93 100 69
Area
7.54 7.54 7.54 7.54 7.54 7.54 7.54 7.54 7.54 7.54 7.54
Aspect Ratio
1.42 1.47 1.87 2.10 1.95 1.46 1.98 2.17 1.93 1.47 1.47
Trans .
156.0 89.4 73.9 43.3 30.8 22.6 19.1 16.2 13.8 11.7 9.6
Screen Designations
Thule Rigtech - VSM 100

SCREEN SERIES: Description: Thule TBC Perforated plate type bonded to a rigid frame. Tensile bolting cloth square mesh over coarse mesh backing cloth. Thule Southwestern Standard screen series for this shaker.
Sources: Comments: Thule TBC Series

Screen Name
TBC 52 TBC 84 TBC 105 TBC 120 TBC 140 TBC 165 TBC 200 TBC 230
U.S. Sieve
49 70 95 106 122 133 168 193

311 212 156 142 123 112 89 75
Flow Capacity Cond.

3.99 3.08 2.38 2.18 1.81 1.67 1.37 1.20
D16
222 n/a 130 118 118 108 86 73
D84
344 n/a 161 146 126 115 92 77
Area
4.30 4.30 4.30 4.30 4.30 4.30 4.30 4.30
Aspect Ratio
1.38 n/a 1.21 1.17 1.07 1.04 1.05 1.04
Trans .
17.2 13.3 10.3 9.4 7.8 7.2 5.9 5.2
Southwestern TBC Replacement Series

Screen Name
52 84 105 120 145 165 200 230
U.S. Sieve
49 70 95 106 122 133 168 193

311 212 156 142 123 112 89 75
Flow Capacity Cond.

4.65 3.25 2.48 2.26 1.87 1.72 1.41 1.23
D16
222 n/a 130 118 118 108 86 73
D84
344 n/a 161 146 126 115 92 77
Area
4.30 4.30 4.30 4.30 4.30 4.30 4.30 4.30
Aspect Ratio
1.38 n/a 1.21 1.17 1.07 1.04 1.05 1.04
Trans .
20.0 14.0 10.7 9.7 8.0 7.4 6.1 5.3
Tri-Flo - Model 148

SCREEN SERIES: Description: Sources: Comments: Tri-Flo Series
Screen Name
50 70 84 110 140 175 210 250
Tri-Flow Hookstrip, 2 in. plastic grid. Standard DX-style composition. Tri-Flow
U.S. Sieve
48 73 86 97 118 152 174 215

320 200 169 153 127 98 86 68
Flow Capacity Cond.

6.77 3.97 3.61 2.89 2.21 1.83 1.67 1.23
D16
234 150 119 107 91 70 60 48
D84
380 241 200 182 153 117 106 82
Area
5.09 5.09 5.09 5.09 5.09 5.09 5.09 5.09
Aspect Ratio
1.45 1.48 1.44 1.46 1.41 1.48 1.41 1.45
Trans.
34.46 20.21 18.37 14.71 11.25 9.31 8.50 6.26
Screen Designations
Triton NNF Screening Machine

SCREEN SERIES: Description: TSS Hookstrip panel, perforated plate with 2 in. openings. Two layers, extra-fine square mesh over square mesh backing cloth. Middle cloth is rectangular mesh in some compositions. Triton Advanced Southwestern Standard screen series for this shaker.
Sources:
Comments: Triton TSS Series

Screen Name
TSS 24 TSS 50 TSS 84 TSS 100 TSS 140 TSS 175 TSS 180 TSS 210 TSS 230
U.S. Sieve
21 48 66 98 117 133 138 144 200

811 403 228 152 129 112 107 103 74
Flow Capacity Cond.

34.11 10.77 6.34 2.89 2.76 2.40 1.33 2.30 1.29
D16
587 302 190 108 93 84 102 79 57
D84
889 429 237 188 143 123 110 110 82
Area
6.19 6.19 6.19 6.19 6.19 6.19 6.19 6.19 6.19
Aspect Ratio
1.36 1.32 1.21 1.47 1.37 1.36 1.04 1.32 1.36
Trans .
211.1 66.7 39.2 17.9 17.0 14.9 8.3 14.3 8.0
Southwestern TSS Replacement Series

Screen Name
TSS 24 TSS 38 TSS 50 TSS 70 TSS 84 TSS 110 TSS 140 TSS 175 TSS 210 TSS 230
U.S. Sieve
21 38 48 73 86 97 118 152 174 215

811 440 320 200 169 153 127 98 86 68
Flow Capacity Cond.

20.69 11.86 6.77 4.17 3.62 2.89 2.32 1.90 1.67 1.23
D16
587 313 234 150 119 107 91 70 60 48
D84
889 537 380 241 200 182 153 117 106 82
Area
5.91 5.91 5.91 5.91 5.91 5.91 5.91 5.91 5.91 5.91
Aspect Ratio
1.36 1.45 1.45 1.48 1.44 1.46 1.41 1.48 1.41 1.45
Trans .
122.3 70.1 40.0 24.7 21.4 17.1 13.7 11.2 9.9 7.3
Solids Control Manual Advanced TSS Replacement Series

Screen Name
TSS 50 TSS 70 TSS 84 TSS 110 TSS 140 TSS 175 TSS 210 TSS 250
U.S. Sieve
47 64 79 99 127 158 185 205

324 234 181 151 118 95 81 72
Flow Capacity Cond.

6.77 4.73 3.62 3.00 2.33 1.87 1.67 1.49
D16
234 171 131 107 86 66 57 51
D84
390 274 223 185 143 113 100 85
Area
6.23 6.23 6.23 6.23 6.23 6.23 6.23 6.23
Aspect Ratio
1.45 1.39 1.48 1.46 1.45 1.46 1.47 1.42
Trans .
42.1 29.4 22.5 18.7 14.5 11.7 10.4 9.3
Appendix D. Pump Performance Curves
D.1
Proprietary: - for the exclusive use of Chevron Corporation Company and other wholly owned subsidiaries of Chevron Corporation.
D.2
Pump Performance Curves
D.3
Proprietary: - for the exclusive use of Amoco Production and other wholly owned subsidiaries of Amoco Corporation.
D.4
D.5
Proprietary: - for the exclusive use of Amoco Production Company and other wholly owned subsidiaries of Amoco Corporation.
D.6
D.7
MISSION MAGNUM 1 6 X 5 X 14
D.8
D.9
MISSION MAGNUM 1 8 X 6 X 11
D.10
D.11
MISSION MAGNUM 8 X 6 X 14
D.12
HARRISBURG
D.13
D.14
HARRISBURG
D.15
HARRISBURG
D.16
D.17
HARRISBURG
D.18
Table E.1 Oilfield Shale Shakers

a b Number of Mfg.&1 Model Decks Screens Screen2 Angles Screen3 Mfg. Screen4 Tension c d e f g Total5 Screen Area (Sq Ft) Vibrator Speed (RPM) Stroke7 (in.) Acceleration8 Type12 Gas Motion Weir Height (in.) h i j k l m n Overall13 Dimensions LxWxH (in.) Weight (lbs) o p
Proprietary: - for the exclusive use of Chevron Corporatin and other wholly owned subsidiaries of Chevron Corporation.
Vibrator6
Comments
Brandt (Division of Drexel Oilfield Services, Inc.) Junior 1 1 Fixed-13 U.S. N.P.T. Spring Loaded one side N.P.T. Spring Loaded one side N.P.T. Spring Loaded one side N.P.T. Spring Loaded one side N.P.T. Spring Loaded one side Top-N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded 9 B.D. 1390 .188 5.1 UE 25.5 54.75x80.75x41.5 980 Duals available.
Standard
Fixed-13
U.S.
20
B.D.
1750
.047
2.0
UE
36.25
83.25x63-5/8x44
1880
Duals & triples available.
Tandem
Fixed 0
U.S.
40
B.D.
1380 142511
.18
4.99 4.011
38
79.75x72x52-5/8
2865
.1
Total Flow Cleaner
Adjust Top +3, +1.5 Btm 0, -1.5 Fixed 0
O.S.
50
B.D.
1860
.11
5.29
40
114.25x82x55.25
5800
Flowback pan; Variable speed model available. Flowback pan.16
Retro FS Basket
O.S.
40
B.D.
1620
.14
5.29
38
60-5/16x66-3/8x 25-3/16
1430
ATL-1000
Adjust Top -0 to -10 Btm -1:0 to -10 2&3: +10 to 0
U.S.
10.8 25.0
D.G.B.D.
1765
.068
3.011
43
99.5x71x56.75
4300
Variable angle
ATL-CS15 Broadbent DT 2000 2 Top-2
N.A.
Btm-P.T.
Top Adjust -10 to -4,-5 to +1 Btm Adjust 0 to +6
O.S.
N.P.T. Bonded Spring Loaded
Top-19.0
B.D
1760
.127
5.39
35
110x69x61.5
4180
Btm-3
Bot-26.4
Table E.1 (Continued) Oilfield Shale Shakers

a b Number of Mfg.&1 Model Cagle Ultra-Screen 1 3 Adjust +3 to -4 Adjust +6 to -4 O.S. N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded N.P.T. Spring Loaded one side 23.3 B.D. 1350 .185 4.8 C 30.5 122x71x53 3700 Duals & Low profiles available. Duals & Low profiles available. Decks Screens Screen2 Angles Screen3 Mfg. Screen4 Tension c d e f g Total5 Screen Area (Sq Ft) Vibrator Speed (RPM) Stroke7 (in.) Acceleration8 Type12 Gas Motion Weir Height (in.) h i j k l m n Overall13 Dimensions LxWxH (in.) Weight (lbs) o p
Vibrator6
Comments
Linear Screen
O.S.
23.3
B.D.
1325
.160
3.611
30.5
122x71x64
4000
Dahlory 139 1 3 Adjust 0 to +5 O.S. N.P.T. Spring Loaded both sides N.P.T. Spring Loaded one side N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded 27 Direct or 1740 Hydraulic 1400-2000 ? ? L 34 112x60x60 5000
145
Fixed-13
O.S.
20
B.D.
1750
1/4-3/8?
UE
18
84x66x54
2000
Duals available.
.2
245 2 2 Fixed 0 U.S. Demco (Discontinued Solids Control Product Line) Tandem Screen Derrick Standard 1 3 Fixed-20, -25, -30 Fixed-5, 10, -15 O.S. 2 2 Fixed-3 O.S. LP 1 3 O.S. Flo-Line Cleaner 1 3 Adjust +6 to 0 O.S.
40
B.D.
1500
156x84x46
5600
N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded
37.5
B.D.
1400
3/8 .1811
5.09 5.011
33.5
97x73x48
2300
N.P.T. Spring Loaded both sides N.P.T. Spring Loaded both sides N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded
23.3
I.
3600
.031 .02211
5.7 4.011
UE
51.5
118x63x74
4500
Ramp-Lok screen tensioning avail. for all units. Singles available. Duals & triples available.
23.3
I.
1750
.100 .08011
4.4 3.511
UE
31.5
124x57x58
4500
23.3
I., I.
1750
.07811
3.411
31.5
123x63x57
5000
Duals & triples available. AWD available.

a b Number of Mfg.&1 Model Flo-Line Cleaner (+) Decks Screens 1 3 Screen2 Angles Adjust +5 to -15 Screen3 Mfg. O.S. Screen4 Tension N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded c d e f g Total5 Screen Area (Sq Ft) 23.3 Vibrator Speed (RPM) 1750 Stroke7 (in.) .07811 Acceleration8 Type12 Gas Motion 3.411 L Weir Height (in.) 27-44 h i j k l m n Overall13 Dimensions LxWxH (in.) 125.75x73.75x68 Weight (lbs) 6000 o p
Vibrator6 I., I.
Comments Duals & triples available. Deck angles adjustable while drilling. Duals & triples available. Deck angles adjustable while drilling.
Flo-Line Cleaner Model 58
Adjust +5 to -15
O.S.
32.9
I., I.
1750
.078
3.4
27-44
125.375x91.25x68
6600
DFE/Solids Control (see N L Baroid) Double Life Corporation Single Tandem Linear Low Profile Linear 2 2 Adjust +5 to -3 O.S. N.P.T. Spring Loaded one side N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded 40 B.D. 1750 3/16? L 38 84x72x62 3300
Adjust +5 to -1
O.S.
23.3
B.D.
1750
3/16?
26"
117.5x66x58
5000
.3
Drexel Oilfield Services, Inc. (see Brandt) Flo-Trend Transition Screen Separator (FTS 3600L) 1 3 Adjust 1:-46 to -39 2&3: -10 to +6 O.S. N.P.T. 35.0 I., I. 1728 .1239 4.29 L 49 128x78x56 5100
Linear Horizontal (LH) Screen Separator (see MTM RLM 28) Fluid Systems, Inc. High Volume Linear Shaker 1 3 Adjust +5 to -5 N.A. P.T. 25.4 I. 1200 .176 3.711 L 34 115x66x42 2500 Polyester screens available.
Geolograph-Pioneer (has merged with Swaco) 24H-100 1 1 Fixed-9 U.S. N.P.T. Spring Loaded one side N.P.T. Spring Loaded one side 8 B.D. 1725 3/16? 7.98? UE 28 68x42x50 1360
34H-150
Fixed-9
U.S.
12
B.D.
1725
3/16?
7.98?
UE
28
68x54x50
1735

a b Number of Mfg.&1 Model 45H-200 Decks Screens 1 1 Screen2 Angles Fixed-10 Screen3 Mfg. U.S. Screen4 Tension N.P.T. Spring Loaded one side N.P.T. Spring Loaded one side N.P.T. Spring Loaded one side c d e f g Total5 Screen Area (Sq Ft) 20 Vibrator Speed (RPM) 1725 Stroke7 (in.) 3/16? Acceleration8 Type12 Gas Motion 7.98? UE Weir Height (in.) 30 h i j k l m n Overall13 Dimensions LxWxH (in.) 80x66x50 Weight (lbs) 2100 o p
Vibrator6 B.D.
Comments Dual 45H-400 available.
JT
Fixed 0
U.S.
24
B.D.
1350
3/16?
4.98 4.811
38
68x60x46
2500
Discontinued, parts only available. Dual DT & Triple TT available.
ST
Fixed 0
U.S.
40
B.D.
1350
3/16?
4.98
38
80x72x46
3200
Harrisburg Junior Standard 1 1 Fixed-8 U.S. N.P.T. Spring Loaded one side N.P.T. Spring Loaded one side N.P.T. Spring Loaded one side N.P.T. Spring Loaded both sides 8.3 B.D. 1750 .125? 5.4? UE 24.5 54-3/4x55.5x43.5 920
.4
Standard 1 1 Fixed-8 U.S. Tandem 2 2 Fixed 0 U.S. Linear Tandem Retrofit 2 2 Adjust +5 to -3 O.S Double Deck 2 2 Fixed 0 U.S. LP 1 3 Fixed-8.5, -11.5,-12. 5, O.S.
20
B.D.
1500
.125?
4.0
UE
30
85-15/16x65x43-3/4
1850
Dual Standard available.
40
B.D.
1500
.125
4.0 3.511
36.75
85-15/16x68.25x 52.5
2800
Has flowback pan; dual & triple tandems available.
40
B.D.
1750
.1159
4.511
36.75
85-15/16x65x43.75
3200
Homco Omega (has merged with Sweco Oilfield Services, Inc.) N.P.T. Spring Loaded one side N.P.T. Spring Loaded both sides 40 B.D. 1350 .15511 4.011 C 38 80x72x46 3200 Same as Geolograph Pioneer ST.
24
B.D.
1750
.113
4.99
UE
30
106x72x49
4500
Same as Totco EVS 24.

a b Number of Mfg.&1 Model Series Decks Screens 1 4 Screen2 Angles Fixed-15, -18, -19 Fixed-13 Screen3 Mfg. O.S. Screen4 Tension N.P.T. Spring Loaded both sides N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded N.P.T. Spring Loaded one side N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded c d e f g Total5 Screen Area (Sq Ft) 32 Vibrator Speed (RPM) 1750 Stroke7 (in.) .113 Acceleration8 Type12 Gas Motion 4.99 UE Weir Height (in.) 59 h i j k l m n Overall13 Dimensions LxWxH (in.) 124.5x72x66 Weight (lbs) 4900 o p
Vibrator6 B.D.
Comments Same as Totco EVS 32.
HutchisonHayes 2760-JR 4860-B4
U.S.
11.3
B.D.
1750
.139
6.1?
UE
34.75
91x47x56
1800
Fixed-13
U.S.
20
B.D.
1750
.054
2.4
UE
36-11/16
91x71x56
2600
Dual 4860-DU available. Dual 4860-EM-DU available. Dual 4860-SU-DU available. Dual 102 available; air mounts. Dual 202-DT available; flowback pan.
4860-EM
Fixed-8
U.S.
20
B.D.
1445
.140
4.4
UE
20-13/16
84x67x38
2100
4860-Su-Sin g
Fixed-13
U.S.
40
B.D.
1750
.070
3.1
UE
36-11/16
91x71x56
2800
.5
101 2 2 Adjust -5 to +3 Fixed 0 U.S. 201-ST 2 2 U.S. Quadraflow 1 4 Fixed +6 O.S. MTM RLM 28 1 3 Adjust +2.5 to 5.5 O.S. SM II 2 2 Adjust +3 to -3 Adjust +3 to -3 O.S. Double Deck 2 2 O.S.
40
B.D.
1750
.076
3.3
UE
39-5/8
95x75x54
2800
40
B.D.
1492
.167
5.3
37-3/16
92x70x45
2500
37.7
Direct
1200
.16
3.0
31
128x68x56.5
4800
Not available for sale.
N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded
28
I.
1740
.1257
4.759
30
122x70x55
4500
10" flowline connection.
N L Bariod (Bariod sold its line of solids control equipment which is now available from Baker Hughes Treatment Services/Bird Machine Co.) N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded 40 B.D. 1303 3/16 4.5 5.011 .06311/1.8 .2511/7.2 .511/14.4 C 37 100x75x47 2600 Tandem SM II available; 10" flowline connection. Tandem Double Deck available; 10" flowline connection.
48
B.D.
1424
Adjust .063--.5 Norm .25
38
124x84x46
4600

a b Number of Mfg.&1 Model Decks Screens Screen2 Angles Screen3 Mfg. Screen4 Tension c d e f g Total5 Screen Area (Sq Ft) Vibrator Speed (RPM) Stroke7 (in.) Acceleration8 Type12 Gas Motion Weir Height (in.) h i j k l m n Overall13 Dimensions LxWxH (in.) Weight (lbs) o p
Vibrator6
Comments
Petroleum Solids Control (same as Dahlory 139) Quality Solids Separation Co. Linear Motion Model QLM-1 1 3 Adjust +5 to -5 O.S. N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded 26.6 I. 1750 .125-.156 3.0-5.59 L 30 115x69x54 4500 Singles & Duals available. 1500 RPM available.
Schiffner (available in Oklahoma from Spike Enterprises) Super Sifter 1 2 Adjust 0 to +3 N.A. P.T. 29.4 I., I. 1200 1/16-5/16 1.3-6.49 L 37 124x72x48 4200
Swaco Geolograph Mini-Shaker 1 2 Adjust -3.5 to -7.25 Fixed 0 O.S. N.P.T. Spring Loaded both sides N.P.T. Spring Loaded one side N.P.T. Spring Loaded both sides N.P.T. Spring Loaded both sides N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded 12 B.D. 1750 .101-.026 1.13-4.39 UE 27 112x44x38 1600 6-position vibrator.
.6
Over/Under
U.S.
40
B.D.
1492
.167
5.39
37-3/16
92x72x43
2500
Same as Hutchison-Hayes 201-ST; duals available.
Super Screen
Fixed 0, -5
O.S.
32
B.D.
1140 115011
.275-.313
5.1-5.89 3.311
UE
28.5
132x74x54
4800
Super Shaker
Fixed 0, -5
O.S.
24
B.D.
1150
.24
4.4
UE
37.75
100x74x45
3700
Adjustable Linear Shaker Sweco Single Tandem
Adjust -3 to +3
O.S.
32
I., I.
1800
3.711,14
33.56
128.75x63x58.32
5200
Vibrator angle adjustable from 25 to 65 in 10 increments.
Adjust +2 to -2
U.S.
N.P.T. Pneumatic
40
B.D.
1460
.21
6.49 4.011
39.25
91.5x81.5x46.25
2950
Duals & triples available; deck hung on cables; flowback pan.
Full-Flo LM-3
Adjust 0 to +5
O.S.
N.P.T.
33.7
B.D.
1735
0-.140 Norm-.094
0-6.09 Norm-4.09 2.811
38
132-1/8x69x71-1/8
5000

a b Number of Mfg.&1 Model OilmizerTM Decks Screens 1 3 Screen2 Angles Adjust 0 to +5 Screen3 Mfg. N.A. Screen4 Tension P.T. c d e f g Total5 Screen Area (Sq Ft) 33.7 Vibrator Speed (RPM) 1735 Stroke7 (in.) 0-.140 Norm-.094 Acceleration8 Type12 Gas Motion 0-6.09 Norm-4.09 2.811 L Weir Height (in.) 38 h i j k l m n Overall13 Dimensions LxWxH (in.) 132-1/8x69x71-1/8 Weight (lbs) 5500 o p
Vibrator6 B.D.
Comments P.T. Screens secured by pneumatic seal; unit designed to achieve 10% or less oil content on cuttings.
Thompson Tool Co. A2R 1 1 Fixed-15 O.S. N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded 8 B.D. 2000 ?10 ?10 UE 23 83x48x39 1475 Automatic sample catcher. Discontinued
B2
Fixed-15
O.S.
B.D.
2000
?10
?10
UE
23
83x38x39
1300
A3R
Fixed-15
O.S.
12
B.D.
2000
?10
?10
UE
26
96x63x48
2300
Automatic sample catcher. Discontinued
.7
B3 1 1 Fixed-15 O.S. A54 1 1 Fixed-15 O.S. B54 1 1 Fixed-15 O.S. Thule Rigtech VSM 120 2 2 Adjust Top +11 to -6.5 Btm 0 to +8 U.S. N.A.
12
B.D.
2000
?10
?10
UE
26
96x49x40
1600
20
B.D.
2000
?10
?10
UE
31
96x73x48
2500
Automatic sample catcher. Discontinued
20
B.D.
2000
?10
?10
UE
31
96x63x48
2300
Top-N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded Btm-P.T.
46
Hydraulic
Variable 1000-2000
.079
Variable 1700/3.911 1800/4.411 1900/4.911
43.75
113-5/8x98.25x53-7/16
6845
Duals & triples available. Bottom P.T. screens secured by hydraulic clamps. Flowback pan.

a b Number of Mfg.&1 Model VSM 100 Decks Screens 2 5 1 4 Screen2 Angles Fixed Top-0 Btm-0, 15 Screen3 Mfg. O.S. Top-N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded Btm-P.T. 15 26 Screen4 Tension c d e f g Total5 Screen Area (Sq Ft) Vibrator Speed (RPM) 1720 Stroke7 (in.) .083 Acceleration8 Type12 Gas Motion 3.5 L Weir Height (in.) 41.8 h i j k l m n Overall13 Dimensions LxWxH (in.) 109x74x54 Weight (lbs) 4905 o p
Vibrator6 B.D.
Comments Duals & triples available. Bottom P.T. screens secured by pneumatic seal. Discharge mud recovery module as standard.
N.A.
Totco (Milchem) (Totco no longer in solids control business.) EVS 24 1 3 Fixed-8.5, -11.5, -12.5 Fixed-15, -18, -19 Fixed 0 O.S. N.P.T. Spring Loaded both sides N.P.T. Spring Loaded both sides N.P.T. Spring Loaded both sides 24 B.D. 1750 .113 4.99 UE 30 106x72x49 4500 Dual EVS 48 units were available. Motor vibrate. Dual EVS 64 & Triple EVS 96 units were available. Motor vibrates. Resonance brakes.
EVS 32
O.S.
32
B.D.
1750
.113
4.99
UE
59
124.5x72x66
4900
.8
MudMaster 2 2 Tri-Flo International, Inc. TFI-126 1 2 TFI-134 1 11 TFI-146 1 2 TFI-148 1 3
O.S.
40
I., I.
900
.5
5.89 3.511
42-1/8
81x76x39
3900
Adjust -5 to -2
O.S.
N.P.T. Spring Loaded both sides N.P.T. Spring Loaded both sides N.P.T. Spring Loaded both sides N.P.T. Spring Loaded both sides
12
B.D.
1750
Adjust .026-.101
1.1-4.49
UE
24
93x44x41
1420
Single only.
Fixed -5
O.S.
12
B.D.
1750
Adjust .040-.134
1.7-5.89
UE
23
93x44x41
1420
Single only.
Fixed 0, -5
O.S.
24
B.D.
1750
Adjust .057-.147
2.5-6.49
UE
30.5
98x65.5x38
2575
Adjust 0 to +5
O.S.
32
B.D.
1750
18
117x80x50
4300
Singles only.

a b Number of Mfg.&1 Model Triton NNF Screening Machine NOTES: 1. All shakers end feed. 2. Negative angles mean the screen slopes downward from the feed end, and positive angles mean upward slopes. For decks with screens with different screen angles, the angles of the individual screens are given in order from the feed to the discharge end. 3. O.S. means overslung and U.S. means underslung. N.A. means not applicable. 4. N.P.T. means nonpretensioned and P.T. means pretensioned. 5. Larger total screen area does not necessarily mean larger fluid or solids handling capability. 6. B.D. means belt drive, I. means integral, and D.G.B.D. means Direct Gear Box Drive. 7. Sometimes referred to as throw. Stroke is twice amplitude and is total motion normal to the screen surface. 8. G = Stroke (in.) x (vibration speed per minute)2 divided by 70,400. One G = 386 in./sec2 . Indicated Gs are zero to peak normal to the screen surface. 9. Indicated G value is per manufacturer. 10. Not available from manufacturer. 11. Measured by Amoco's Grant Young or Al Cutt, OSUs Larry Hoberock, and/or Cagle Oilfield Services, Inc.'s Bill Cagle. 12. Type motion is either circular (C), balanced elliptical (BE), unbalanced elliptical (UE), or linear (L). N.A. means not applicable. 13. L is length, W is width, and H is height. Per manufacturer. 14. Measured at 80% of maximum eccentricity setting. 15. Advanced Technology Linear Cascading System (ATL-CS) also available. The ATL-CS incorporates a circular motion double-deck scalping shaker above a linear motion single deck shaker (ATL-1100). Deck angles for ATL-1000 & ATL-1100 are the same. Weir height = 80" Weight = 8000 lbs. 16. Note: The Retro FS Basket replaces the Tandem Basket on existing rig shakers. Decks Screens 1 3 Screen2 Angles Adjust -1 to +5 Screen3 Mfg. O.S. Screen4 Tension N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded c d e f g Total5 Screen Area (Sq Ft) 27.4 Vibrator Speed (RPM) 1728 Stroke7 (in.) .1259 .121 Acceleration8 Type12 Gas Motion 5.19 3.7 L Weir Height (in.) 33 h i j k l m n Overall13 Dimensions LxWxH (in.) 122x68x60 Weight (lbs) 4960 o p
Vibrator6 I., I.
Comments Singles only.
.9
Table E.2 Oilfield Shale Shaker Classification

Coarse 10-30 Mesh
Brandt Junior Brandt Standard Dahlory 145 Geolograph-Pioneer 24 H-100, 34 H-150, 45 H-200, & JT Harrisburg Junior & Standard Hutchinson Hayes 2760-JR, 4860-B4, 4860-EM, 4860-SU-SING Swaco Mini-Shaker Thompson A2R, B2, A3R, B3, A54, B54 Tri-Flo TFI-126, TFI-134
Medium 40-80 Mesh

Brandt Tandem Dahlory 147 Demco Tandem Geolograph-Pioneer ST Harrisburg Tandem Hutchison Hayes 101 & 201-ST NL Bariod SM II Swaco Super Shaker Sweco Tandem Totco EVS 24
Fine 80-120 Mesh

Brandt Retrofit FS Brandt Total Flow Cleaner Derrick Standard Flo-Trend Floline Separator NL Bariod Double Deck Oiltools Tandem 800A Swaco Super Screen Totco EVS 32 Totco MudMaster Tri-Flo TFI-146
Extra Fine 130-325 Mesh

Brandt ATL1000 Broadbent DT-2000 Cagle Linear Screen Cagle Ultra-Screen Dahlory 139 Derrick LP Derrick Flo-Line Cleaner Derrick Flo-Line Cleaner (+) Derrick Flo-Line Cleaner Model 58 Double like Single Tandem Linear Double like Low Profile Linear Flo-Trend Transition Screen Separator (FTS 3600L) Flo-Trend Linear Horizontal Screen Separator Fluid Systems High Volume Linear Shaker Harrisburg Linear Tandem Retrofit Hutchison Hayes Quadraflow Quality QLM-1 MTM RLM 28 Schiffner Super Sifter Swaco Adjustable Linear Shaker Sweco Full-Flo LM-3 Sweco Oilmizer Thule VSM 100 Thule VSM 120 Tri-Flo TFI-148 MT Triton NNF Screening Machine
.10
Note: The above classifications are general and are based on design and performance. In special flow rate, plugging, and/or viscosity situations, any of the above shakers could probably run finer or coarser screens than indicated.
Table E.3 Oilfield Centrifugal Pumps1

a b c d e f g Shaft Size Coupling End/Thru Packing (in.) h i j k l m n Required Impeller Size (in.) & Horsepower for 500 gpm & 75 ft of Head for Various RPMs Mud Weights Impeller Horsepower (RPM) Size Water 10 ppg 14 ppg 18 ppg
Mfg. & Model
Impeller Size Range (in.)
Casing Design
2,3,4,5
Materials of Constr.
Lubrication
Shaft6 Sealing
Comments
Baker Huges Pumps
1780 Series (equivalent to Mission Type W pumps) 2500 Series (equivalent to Mission Magnum 1 pump) 3000 Series (Formerly Galigher Pumps)
5x6 (5x6x11) 9-11 Circular Cast Iron, Elastomer Lined11 6x8 (6x8x14) 11-14 Circular Cast Iron, Elastomer Lined11 Oil Bath C.P.4 1-7/8/3.0 1150 12.25 21 25.2 35.3 45.4 Oil Bath C.P.4 1-7/8/3.0 1150 1750 >11 9" N.A. 18.0 N.A. 21.5 N.A. 30.2 N.A. 38.8
Impeller locked on or threaded. Clockwise rotation only.13 Impeller locked on or threadbare on. Clockwise rotation only.13
.11
BJ Hughes3
5" (5x6x13.5) 9-13.59 Volute Cast Iron Grease C.P. 1-13/16/1-1 3/16 1150 1750 13.5 9 14.0 15.5 16.8 18.6 23.5 26.1 30.3 33.5
Suction line should never be smaller than suction inlet. Discontinued manufacturing. Suction line should never be smaller than suction inlet. Discontinued manufacturing.
6" (6x8x14.5)
10-14.59
Volute
Cast Iron
Grease
C.P.
1-13/16/1-1 3/16
1150 1750
13.25 <10"
15.5 N.A.
18.6 N.A.
26.1 N.A.
33.5 N.A.
Demco3,12 (Demco centrifugal pumps now available from Mattco.)

CP 8-128 5x6 (5x6x12) 6x8 (6x8x12) XD4 8-11.5 5x6x11 5x6x14 10-14 Circular Circular Hard Iron Std. Hard Iron Std. Oil Bath C.P., M.S. 1-7/8/2.5 1150 1750 1150 1750 >11.5 9 12.5 <10" N.A. 15 16 N.A. N.A. 18.0 19.2 N.A. N.A. 25.2 26.9 N.A. N.A. 32.4 34.6 N.A. 8-128 Circular Cast Iron Std.11 Oil Bath C.P., M.S. 1-7/8/1-7/8 1150 1750 12-3/8 9 17.0 24.0 20.4 28.8 28.6 40.3 36.7 51.9 Circular Cast Iron Std.11 Oil Bath C.P., M.S. 1-7/8/1-7/8 1150 1750 >12 8.5 N.A. 16.0 N.A. 19.2 N.A. 26.9 N.A. 34.6
Clockwise rotation only.13
Oil Bath
C.P., M.S.
1-7/8/2.5
Table E.3 (Continued) Oilfield Centrifugal Pumps1

Proprietary: - for the exclusive use of Chevron Corporatin and other wholly owned subsidiaries of Chevron Corporation. a b c d e f g Shaft Size Coupling End/Thru Packing (in.)
1-7/8/2.5 1-7/8/2.5
Mfg. & Model

6x8x11 6x8x14

8-11 10-14
Required Impeller Size (in.) & Horsepower for 500 gpm & 75 ft of Head for Various RPMs Mud Weights Impeller Horsepower (RPM) Size Water 10 ppg 14 ppg 18 ppg
1150 1750 1150 1750 <11" 9.25 12.75 <10" N.A. 16.5 18.0 N.A. N.A. 19.38 21.6 N.A. N.A. 27.7 30.3 N.A. N.A. 35.7 38.9 N.A.
Casing Design
Circular Circular
Hard Iron Std. Hard Iron Std.
Lubrication
Oil Bath Oil Bath
Shaft6 Sealing
C.P., M.S. C.P., M.S.
Comments
Gorman-Rupp2,3
ID Series 1.5"-6 pumps 4-7/8-11.2 5 Volute Cast Iron Grease, oil Greaselubr. seal w/spring-lo aded grease cup Variable Flow rates up to 3500 gpm: Heads up to 180 ft.
Trash pumps. Inspect impeller thru removable coverplate without removing piping. Self-priming. Handle 1"-3 size solids depending on model. Available with air cooled gasoline or diesel engines. Pumps mounted on pneumatic tires or skid base. Designed for dirty water & limited solids-handling appl. Self-priming. Avail. with air cooled or water cooled gasoline or diesel engines. Pumps mounted on pneumatic tires or skid base.
.12
80 Series 1.5"-12, 40 Models 5-18 Volute Cast Iron Grease, oil Greaselubr. seal w/spring-lo aded grease cup Variable Flow rates up to 7000 gpm: Heads up to 200 ft. Mud Pumps4 6x5x11 8-11 Circular Cast Iron Casing w/Ductile Iron Impeller Grease, oil C.P., M.S. 1-7/8/2.157 1150 1750 >11 9" N.A. 17.0 N.A. 20.4 N.A. 28.6 N.A. 36.7
Harrisburg3,9
178 9-12 5x6 (5x6x12) 6x8 9-13.25 Circular Circular Cast Iron, Ductile Iron, or Alum. Bronze Cast Iron, Ductile Iron, or Alum. Bronze Oil Bath C.P., M.S. 1-7/8/1-7/8 1150 1750 >12 8.5 N.A. 16.3 N.A. 19.6 N.A. 27.4 N.A. 35.2
Oil Bath
C.P., M.S.
1-7/8/1-7/8
1150 1750
12.5 <9
17.5 N.A.
21.0 N.A.
29.4 N.A.
37.8 N.A.

1-7/8/2.5 1-7/8/2.5
Mfg. & Model

Honcho 250 5x6 6x8

10-14 10-14
1150 1750 1150 1750 12.5 <10 13.5 10.5 17.8 N.A. 22.9 29.0 21.4 N.A. 27.5 34.8 29.9 N.A. 38.5 48.7 38.5 N.A. 49.5 62.7
Casing Design
Circular Circular
Ductile Iron Ductile Iron
Lubrication
Oil, grease Oil, grease
Shaft6 Sealing
C.P., M.S. C.P., M.S.
Comments Impeller locking system.
Impeller locking system. Extra Life Package available for abrasive service.
MCM4,7,12
178 Series3 5x6 (5x6x12) 6x8 (6x8x13) 250 Series4 5x6x11 5x6x14 6x8x11 6x8x14 8-127 Circular Cast Iron, Hard Iron11 9-13.257 Circular Cast Iron, Hard Iron11 Ductile Iron Oil Bath C.P., M.S. 1-7/8/1-7/8 Oil Bath C.P., M.S. 1-7/8/1-7/8 1150 1750 >12 8.5 N.A. 16.0 N.A. 19.2 N.A. 26.9 N.A. 34.6
All impellers made of ductile iron.
1150 1750 1150 1750 1150 1750 1150 1750 1150 1750
12.5 9 >11.5 9 12.5 <10 >11 9.25 12.75 <10
17.0 24.0 N.A. 15.0 15.1 N.A. N.A. 17.0 18.0 N.A.
20.4 28.38 N.A. 18.0 18.1 N.A. N.A. 20.4 21.6 N.A.
28.6 40.3 N.A. 25.2 25.4 N.A. N.A. 28.6 30.3 N.A.
36.7 51.9 N.A. 32.4 32.6 N.A. N.A. 36.7 38.9 N.A.
All impellers made of ductile iron.
.13
8-11.5 8-11.0 10-14 8-11 10-14.125 10-14
Circular
Oil Bath
C.P., M.S.
1-7/8/2.5
All 250 Series impellers are open design and right hand rotation only.
Circular Circular Circular
Ductile Iron Ductile Iron Ductile Iron
Oil Bath Oil Bath Oil Bath
C.P., M.S. C.P., M.S. C.P., M.S.
1-7/8/2.5 1-7/8/2.5 1-7/8/2.5
Mission - Fluid King Oilfield Products

Type W3,4,7,12 5x6 R&C13 6x8 R13 9-13.257 Circular Cast Iron11 Grease C.P. 1-7/8/1-7/8 8-127 Circular Cast Iron11 Grease C.P. 1-7/8/1-7/8 1150 1750 1150 1750 >12 9.5 12-3/8 9 N.A. 16.9 17.1 24.0 N.A. 20.3 20.5 N.A. 28.4 28.7 N.A. 36.5 37.0
Magnum 13,4,7
11-14 6x5x11 6x5x14 10-14 Circular Cast Iron11 Grease, oil C.P., M.S. 1-7/8/2.5 Circular Cast Iron11 Grease, oil C.P., M.S. 1-7/8/2.5 1150 1750 1150 1750 >11.5 9.0 12.5 <10 N.A. 15.0 15.6 N.A. N.A. 18.0 N.A. N.A. 25.2 N.A. N.A. 32.4 N.A.
Clockwise rotation only.

1-7/8/2.5 1-7/8/2.5 1-7/8/2.5
Mfg. & Model

8x6x11 8x6x14 10x8x14

8-11 10--14-1/8 12-14
1150 1750 1150 1750 1150 1750 <11 9.25 13-1/8 10 14 <12 N.A. 16.7 20.7 26.0 26.4 N.A. N.A. 20.0 24.8 31.2 31.7 N.A. N.A. 28.1 34.8 43.7 44.4 N.A. N.A. 36.1 44.7 56.2 57.0 N.A.
Casing Design
Circular Circular Circular
Cast Iron11
Lubrication
Grease, oil Grease, oil Grease, oil
Shaft6 Sealing
C.P., M.S. C.P., M.S. C.P., M.S.
Comments
Cast Iron11 Cast Iron11
Thompson Tool Co.3,4,7,12

Type F Packless 5x6 R&C13 8.5-10.5 Circular Hard Iron Std. Hard Iron Std. Grease Packless 1.75/N.A.10 1750 8.5 16.4 19.7 27.6 35.4
Type FS Packless self-priming pumps also available in 5" and 6" sizes.
.14
6x6 R&C13
8.5-10.5
Circular
Grease
Packless
1.75/N.A.10
A. R. Wilfley & Sons, Inc.4,11

ES 6x4 13 2" diam range 17 2" diam range Volute Hard Iron Std. Oil Bath N.A.10 2.12/N.A.10 1150 1750 13" gives 82' TDH and requires 17 HP 13" gives 196' TDH and requires 52 HP
Packingless design; available in a variety of metals and elastomers. Closed impeller design. Packingless design; available in a variety of metals and elastomers. Closed impeller design.
8x6
Volute
Hard Iron Std.
Oil Bath
N.A.10
2.38/N.A.10
1150 1750
Note: Wilfley impellers are too hard to be turned down as many other manufacturer's impellers can be.

Proprietary: - for the exclusive use of Chevron Corporatin and other wholly owned subsidiaries of Chevron Corporation. a b c d e f g Shaft Size Coupling End/Thru Packing (in.) h i j k l m n Required Impeller Size (in.) & Horsepower for 500 gpm & 75 ft of Head for Various RPMs Mud Weights Impeller Horsepower (RPM) Size Water 10 ppg 14 ppg 18 ppg
Mfg. & Model
Casing Design
Lubrication
Shaft6 Sealing
Comments
NOTES: 1. All horizontal-type mounted on pedestal or frame except as indicated. 2. Vertical centrifugal pumps available. 3. All impellers of semi-open design. 4. Impeller has expeller vanes on back side. 5. Pumps are elastomer lined. 6. C.P. means conventional packing; M.S. means mechanical seal. 7. Cutdown impellers available in 1/8 increments. 8. Cutdown impellers available in 1/4 increments. 9. Cutdown impellers available in 1/2 increments. 10. N.A. means not applicable. 11. Also available in more wear-resistant metals. 12. Available in both clockwise and counterclockwise rotation. 13. R means clockwise rotation from drive end and C means counterclockwise rotation from drive end.
.15
Table E.4 Oilfield Degassers

a b c Nominal
2,3
Mfg. & Model Brandt DG-54
Type1
Flow Rate (gpm)
Vacuu m5 Range (in. Hg)
Overall Dimensions LxWxH (in.)
Weight (lbs)
Comments
Vacuum emptied by jet pump. Vacuum emptied by jet pump.
500
7-20 max 29
88x54x62
2390
Mud flows over four stacked conical baffles (9956 in2 area). Jet pump requires 75 ft feed head. All units must be started up before gas cut mud appears to prevent gas locking. Mud flows over seven stacked conical baffles (32060 in2 area). Jet pump requires 75 ft feed head.
DG-104
1000
7-20
100x60x77
3900
Burgess & Associates Mfg., Inc. Magna-Vac 500 Vacuum emptied by self-contained centrifugal pump.
500 10" 39" diam x 64" ht 1000
All units self-contained. All models designed to set down in mud tank. All models designed to allow easy passage of lost circulation materials. All units designed to break down into two pieces for portability. All models have vacuum created by regenerative vacuum blower. All units have positive gas discharge. Gas separated by vacuum and turbulence. All units must have suction and discharge submerged to start up. All units run noisy at approximately 85 db, and ear protection should be worn if working near for extended periods. 20 HP motor. 20 HP motor. Portable unit breaks down into two pieces weighing 875 and 600 lbs respectively. 20 HP hydraulic motor. Portable.
.16
Magna-Vac 1000 H Vacu-Flo 5004
Magna-Vac 1000 Vacuum emptied by self-contained centrifugal pump. Vacuum emptied by self-contained centrifugal pump.
1000
10"
44" diam x 73" ht
1475
1000
10"
44" diam x 58" ht
875
Magna-Vac 1500 Vacuum emptied by self-contained centrifugal pump.
1000
15"
44" diam x 73" ht
1675
20 HP drive motor and 5 HP vacuum booster. Portable.
Demco (Discontinued Solids Control Product Line - Model 600 degasser taken off market in early 1980's.) Derrick Equipment Co. Vacuum emptied by jet.
500 7-20 max 29 93.75x59.5x60 2900
Mud flows over four stacked conical corrugated baffles. Jet pump requires 75 ft feed head. Unit must be started before gas cut mud appears to prevent gas locking. Except for top outlet, bolt-on access door, and corrugated baffles, the Vacu-Flo 500 is a copy of the Brandt DG-5.
Table E.4 (Continued) Oilfield Degassers

Proprietary: - for the exclusive use of Chevron Corporatin and other wholly owned subsidiaries of Chevron Corporation. a b c Nominal
2,3
Mfg. & Model Vacu-Flo 1000

4
Type1 Vacuum emptied by jet.
Flow Rate (gpm)

1000

7-20 max 29

100x60x77
Weight (lbs)
3900
Comments Mud flows over seven stacked conical baffles. Jet pump requires 75 ft feed head. Unit must be started before gas cut mud appears to prevent gas locking. Except for top outlet, bolt-on access door, and corrugated baffles, the Vacu-Flo 1000 is a copy of the Brandt DG-10.
.17

2,3
Mfg. & Model
Type1
Flow Rate (gpm)
Weight (lbs)
Comments
Flo-Trend Systems, Inc. (Discontinued marketing Centri-Vac Ft-600 and FT-1000 degassers.) Geolograph Pioneer (Geolograph Pioneer now merged with Swaco Geolograph who advised 4/24/91 that Pioneer Solids Control equipment still available. See Swaco-Geolograph for information about the Geolograph Pioneer Hurricane CD-800 and CD-1400 degassers.) Hutchison-Hayes Intl, Inc. (Discontinued marketing Rhumba Vac-Degasser about 1986. Smith International (Drilco) See-Flo Standard Pit Atmospheric filled by patented centrifugal pump.
700 None 69x44x90.5 1000
All units set down in the mud tank. All units separate gas by turbulence and impact. Gas disposal vent system (optional) available. Standard and Deep Pit models are portable. 7.5 HP motor. 10 HP motor. 30 HP motor.
See-Flo Deep Pit Atmospheric filled by patented centrifugal pump.
700
None
69x44x114.5
1200
.18
See-Flo Big Volume Swaco D-Gasser Horizontal4
(Discontinued this model during early 1980's)
2000
Vacuum emptied by jet pump.
1200
8-15
157x42x89
3350
Gas separated as mud flows over flat plates under vacuum. Jet pump requires 75-160 feet feed head. TOGA (Total Gas) H2S Containment System available which consists of a Swaco H2S Mud-Gas Separator working in series with a Swaco D-Gasser. Unit must be started up before gas cut mud appears to prevent gas locking. Vertical unit consists of several cascading baffle plates and only recommended for applications with limited space. Not as efficient as horizontal unit. Unit must be started up before gas cut mud appears to prevent gas locking. All Hurricane units designed to set down in the mud tank. Uses centrifugal force to pump the fluid and to separate the gas. Used to deaerate muds that inherently tend to foam. All Hurricane units originally developed by Geolograph Pioneer. All units compact and can be broken down for easy transport. 15 HP motor. 25 HP motor.
D-Gasser Vertical4 Hurricane CD-800
Vacuum emptied by jet pump. Atmospheric filled by centrifugal pump action.
1200
8-15
60x42x146
2950
800 w/water
none
42.5x37.5x103
1650
Hurricane CD-1400 Sweco
Atmospheric filled by centrifugal pump action.
1400 w/water
none
57.5x46.5x104
2400

2,3
Mfg. & Model DG-2
Type1 Vacuum emptied by centrifugal pump.
Flow Rate (gpm)

800

9-14

77x49x86
Weight (lbs)
2400
Comments Self-contained unit must set beside mud tank. Vacuum pump creates vacuum in the chamber. Gas separated by combination of centrifugal force, turbulence, and vacuum. No auxiliary pump required. Vacuum adjusted with a regulator valve. 15 HP motor.
Note: Sweco at one time marketed DG-3 and DG-4 degassers but has discontinued these two units and now only markets the DG-2. VG-1 Vacuum emptied by jet pump.
1000 8-15 144x42x60 2200
Gas separated as mud flows over flat plates under vacuum. Unit must be started up before gas cut mud appears to prevent gas locking. Unit much like Swaco Horizontal D-Gasser except vessel is slightly larger in diameter and vacuum pump and motor both located on the skid.
Thule Rigtech (Thule markets the Burgess Degasser.) Tillett Tool Co. Gas Hog Atmospheric filled by impeller pump.
800-1000 800 optimum <2 42x42x125 or 150 1200 & 1250
.19
Unit sets down in tank. Mud pumped into chamber where a spinning disk deflects the mud radially toward the wall over three sets of baffles. Gas separated by impact and turbulence and removed by vacuum blower. Optional blower available if gas is to be vented more than 200 ft away.
Totco (Discontinued Solids Control product Line.) TSC-500 A4 Vacuum emptied by jet pump fed by self-priming centrifugal pump.
500 w/water 10-26 27 max 76x72x72 2200
Unit has microprocessor which monitors oil pressure inside the vacuum pump, liquid level inside the suction air scrubber and the load condition on both the vacuum pump and the centrifugal pump motor. If any of these conditions exceed preset limits, the unit shuts down and indicates where the problem is on the control panel. Gas separated by turbulence, flow as thin sheet over baffles, and vacuum. Unit must be started up before gas out mud appears to prevent gas locking.
Note: Totco at one time marketed Milchem's AV vacuum degasser but discontinued the AV in favor of the TSC-500 A. Tri-Flo Compact 800 Degasser4 Horizontal Degasser4 Well Control Vacuum emptied by jet pump. Vacuum emptied by jet pump.
600 Max 13 48x48x95 2600
Gas separated by vacuum over baffle plates. Gas being separated used to equalize the vacuum rather than air as with other manufacturer's units. All units must be started up before gas cut mud appears to prevent gas locking. Gas separated by vacuum over angled baffle plates.
1200
Max 13
171x43x72
3900

2,3
Mfg. & Model 82004
Type1 Vacuum emptied by jet pump.
Flow Rate (gpm)

450

8-12

96x36x62
Weight (lbs)
1500
Comments No vacuum pump. Like Model 5200 uses a dual ejector venturi and jet pump with a 1.939" nozzle and a cyclone separator. Jet pump requires 10 to 35 psi. Gas separated over cone and inverted cone reversing flow baffles. Unit must be started before gas cut mud appears to prevent gas locking. No vacuum pump. Like Model 5200 uses a dual ejector venturi and jet pump with a 1.939" nozzle and a cyclone separator. Jet pump requires 10 to 35 psi. Gas separated over cone and inverted cone reversing flow baffles. Unit must be started before gas cut mud appears to prevent gas locking. Self-contained unit with vacuum pump for drawing mud into the vessel and a self-priming centrifugal pump to remove mud from the vessel. Gas separated under vacuum over a series of conical shaped baffles. A 60-75 HP motor used on self-priming centrifugal pump. No vacuum pump. Uses a dual ejector venturi jet pump to draw mud into the unit by vacuum and to discharge the mud from the vessel. Gas separated under vacuum over four stacked conical baffles (9328 in2). Mud and gas mixture discharged by ejector through a cyclone separator which separates the gas out top and mud out bottom to active mud pit. Mud return line should extend down to one ft. above bottom of mud tank. Jet pump requires 35 to 55 psi. Uses a 1.939" jet pump nozzle. Unit must be started up before gas cut mud appears to prevent gas locking.
62004
Vacuum emptied by jet pump.
850
8-12
168x48x76
2600
3200
Vacuum emptied by self-priming centrifugal pump. Vacuum emptied by jet pump.
1100
8-12
91x60x92
6000
.20
52004
1100
8-12
156x60x72
3500
NOTES: 1. Degassers are classified as either atmospheric or vacuum. To be classified as a vacuum degasser, a unit must maintain a continuous 5 in. of mercury vacuum. 2. Nominal flow rates given are for water. Flow rates for viscous muds are less. Flow rates for heavy, viscous gas cut muds are much less. 3. Values given are per manufacturer. 4. All vacuum units using jet pumps to discharge the mud must be started up before the gas cut mud appears to prevent gas locking. 5. The level of vacuum attained is a function of mud weight, mud viscosity, the height of the degasser above the mud surface, and the capability of the vacuum pump.
Table E.5 Oilfield Hydrocyclones1

a b c d e f Flow Rate5 at Rec. Head (gpm,ft) g
Mfg. &1 Model
Cone Diam. (in.)
Inlet Type
Cone Construction
Underflow Adjustment
Special Features/Comments
Bailey-Parks Urethane, Inc. (Bailey-Parks builds cones for various oilfield solids control companies.) Rectangular Tangent 2.5" 2.375 Polyurethane4 Fixed .125 & cutoff to .75" 6,45 Ramp Rectangular Tangent 4" 4.0 Polyurethane4 Adjust .125 to .50" 50,75 Ramp 5" 5.0 Circular Tangent Polyurethane4 Adjust .25 to .75" 80,75 5" 5.0 Circular Tangent Polyurethane4 Adjust .25 to .75" Adjust .75 to 1.25" 80,75 500,75
1.25" Victaulics on inlet and overflow, 3-piece cone 2" Victaulics on inlet and overflow, 2-piece cone 2" Victaulics on inlet and overflow, 2-piece cone 2" Flange on inlet; 2" Victaulic on overflow, 2-piece cone 5" Victaulics on inlet and overflow, 3-piece cone
10" 10.125 Rectangular Involute Polyurethane4 Baker Hughes Pumps 3" (same as MPE 3" 50 gpm cone with rectangular tangent entry) 4" 5" 10" 4.07 5.07 9.95 Circular Tangent Circular Tangent Rectangular Tangent Polyurethane Polyurethane Polyurethane
.21
Adjust .125 to .625" Adjust .125 to .625" Fixed 1, 1.25, 1.75"
Ceramic insert in apex area for wear resistance, victaulics on inlet and overflow, 2-piece cone Ceramic insert in apex area on inlet and victaulic 80,32-38 on overflow, either flanged or victaulic, 2-piece psi cone 500, 5" Victaulics on inlet and overflow, fixed apex acts 32-38 psi as wear inserts, available with ceramic insert
50,32-38 psi
Baker-Hughes Treatment Systems, Inc. (see NL Baroid) Baroid (see NL Baroid) Bird Machine Co. (see NL Baroid) C. E. Bauer (Bauer manufactures a wide variety of cones of common and exotic materials for a wide variety of industrial users and has supplied cones to the oilfield.) Fixed .125 and cut off to 3"(600-3) 3 Circular Tangent Nylon 20,922 17 gpm at 75 ft head2 Threaded .75" Fixed .25 and cut off to 110,802 108 gpm at 75 ft head2 Victaulics 6"(606-110) 6 Circular Tangent Nylon 1.125" Fixed 1.0 and cut off to 12"(623-4) 12 Circular Tangent Stainless Steel 650,1152 400 gpm at 75 ft head2 Victaulics or Flanges 2.75" Brandt (Division of Drexel Oilfield Services, Inc.) ?2-piece cone, victaulics on feed and overflow, 2" ? ? Polyurethane? Fixed? 20,75 ceramic insert molded into apex, manifolds available with 4-24 cones 2-piece cone, victaulics on feed and overflow, 2 4" 3.9 Rectangular Involute Polyurethane? Adjust .125 to .69" 66,75 manifolds available with 1, 2, or 3 cones in either vertical or slant mounting
Table E.5 (Continued) Oilfield Hydrocyclones1

Proprietary: - for the exclusive use of Chevron Corporatin and other wholly owned subsidiaries of Chevron Corporation. a b c d e f Flow Rate5 at Rec. Head (gpm,ft) 492,752 g
Mfg. &1 Model 12" Dahlory, Inc. 4" 10" 3.9
Cone Diam. (in.) 12.2
Inlet Type Circular Involute
Cone Construction Polyurethane?
Underflow Adjustment Fixed 1.5, 1.75, 2.125"
Special Features/Comments 3-piece cone, victaulics on feed and overflow, manifolds available with 1, 2, or 3 cones in either vertical or slant mounting Manifolds available with 2-20 4" cones, Victaulics on feed and overflow, 2-piece cone Manifolds available with 1, 2, or 3 10" cones, Victaulics on feed and overflows, 3-piece cone
Rectangular Tangent Rectangular Tangent
Polyurethane Polyurethane
Adjustable .25 to .625" Adjustable .5 to 1.75"
55,75 500,75
10.25
Demco (Discontinued Solids Control Product Line; see RETSCO for available Demco cones.) Derrick Equipment Co. 2" 2 Circular Tangent Polyurethane4 Adjust .25 to .50" 15,75 All Derrick 2", 3", and 4" cones are designed to fit the same manifold. 2 valves are standard on all circular manifolds optional for all in-line manifolds. Polykineticurethane bottom liner, screws together, 2-piece cone, in-line or circular manifolds available, 2" valves on inlets, victaulics on inlet and overflow, manifolds available with 6-20 4" cones
.22
4" 4" 5"
3" (same as MPE 3" 50 gpm cone with rectangular tangent entry) Polyurethane4
3.813
Circular Tangent Ramp
Adjust .25 to .56"
50,75
DFE/Solids Control (see NL Baroid) Drilco (see Smith International) Flo Trend Systems, Inc. 2" (same as Bailey Parks 2.5"; see Bailey Parks) 3" (same as Hydro-Separation Systems, Inc. 3" 50 gpm cone with rectangular tangent entry) Rectangular Tangent Polyurethane4 Adjust 0 to .625" 4" 4 Ramp Rectangular Tangent Adjust 0 to .625" 4 Polyurethane 5" 4.9 Ramp 0 to .750" Geolograph-Pioneer (has merged with Swaco; see Swaco) Harrisburg 3.875 4.875 Circular Tangent Circular Tangent Polyurethane4 Polyurethane4 Adjust 0 to .75" Adjust 0 to .75"
62,752 102,752
Victaulics on feed and overflow, 2-piece cone, manifolds available with 4-20 4" cones Flange on inlet and victaulic on overflow, 2-piece cone; manifolds available with 4-20 5" cones
50,75 80,75
Manifolds available with 8-24 cones, victaulics on feed and overflow, 2-piece cone Manifolds available with 8-20 cones, flange on inlet and victaulic on overflow, 2-piece cone

Proprietary: - for the exclusive use of Chevron Corporatin and other wholly owned subsidiaries of Chevron Corporation. a b c d e f Flow Rate5 at Rec. Head (gpm,ft) g
Mfg. &1 Model
Cone Diam. (in.)
Inlet Type
Cone Construction
Special Features/Comments Manifolds available with 1-3 cones slant mounted and 1-2 cones vertically mounted, victaulics on inlet and overflow, 3-piece cone Manifolds available with 4-16 cones, flange on inlet and victaulic on overflow, 2-piece cone Manifolds available with 1-4 cones, victaulics on inlet and overflow, 3-piece cone All cones designed and developed by Amoco's Grant Young, brass snap-locks on inlets and overflows, 2-piece cone All 3" cones made to fit several other manufacturers' 4" cone manifolds, all 3" have victaulics on inlets and overflows, 2-piece cone 2-piece cone Fits Brandt 4" cone manifolds, 2-piece cone
10"
10.0
Rectangular Involute
Polyurethane4
Adjust 0 to 1.5"
500,75
Hutchinson Hayes International, Inc. 5" 10" 4.77 10.2 Circular Tangent Rectangular Involute Polyurethane Polyurethane Adjust .25 to .5" Fixed 1, 1.25, 1.50" 80,75 500,75
Hydro-Separation Systems, Inc. (Now MPE) 1" 1.0 Rectangular Tangent Polyurethane4 Polyurethane4 Polyurethane4 Polyurethane4 Fixed .080" Fixed .24, .30, .40, .50, .60" Fixed .24, .30, .40, .50, .60" Fixed .24, .30, .40, .50, .60" Adjust 3.75 to 1.063" Fixed .375 and cut off to 1.5" Same as U4 Same as U4 Adjust .375 to 3.0" Fixed .5 to 2.0" Fixed ceramic .5 to 3.0" 5,75
.23
3" 3" 3" Krebs Engineers U4 U4B PU6 TU10 3.25" vortex 6.3 in2 inlet
3.0 3.0 3.0
Rectangular Tangent Rectangular Tangent Rectangular Involute
32,75 50,75 50,75
3.9 3.9 6.0 10.0
Rectangular Involute Rectangular Involute Rectangular Involute Rectangular Involute
Polyurethane4 Polyurethane4 Polyurethane4 Polyurethane4
86,752 91,752 180,752 390,752
Victaulic connections on inlet, and overflow. Replaceable, fixed and adjustable apexes in various sizes. Replaceable vortex finders in various sizes. Same as above Same as above Victaulic connections on inlet, and overflow. Replaceable, fixed and adjustable apexes in various sizes. Ceramic apexes also available.
TU10 4" vortex 10.0 Rectangular Involute Polyurethane4 Same as TU10 above 600,752 Same as above 9.52 in2 inlet Morganite Canada, Inc. (formerly Permathane; now see Wren Sales (92) Ltd.) NL Bariod (Baroid sold its line of solids control equipment to DFE/Solids control who sold to Reserve Pits Inc., who sold to Baker Hughes Treatment Services; Baroid solids control equipment now available from Baker Hughes Treatment Services/Bird Machine Co.) Victaulics on inlet and overflow, 2-piece cone man5" 4.7 Circular Tangent Polyurethane? Adjust 0 to .7" 83,75 ifolds available with 6, 8, m 12, or 16 5" cones

Proprietary: - for the exclusive use of Chevron Corporatin and other wholly owned subsidiaries of Chevron Corporation. a b c d e f Flow Rate5 at Rec. Head (gpm,ft) 500,75 g
Mfg. &1 Model 10"
Cone Diam. (in.) 10.1
Inlet Type Rectangular Involute
Cone Construction Polyurethane?
Underflow Adjustment ? to 1.3
Special Features/Comments Victaulics on inlet and overflow, 3-piece cone manifolds available with 1, 2, 3, or 4 10" slant-mounted cones
Ohio Rubber (Discontinued oilfield hydrocyclone line and sold cone molds to various other companies; see MPE.) Oiltools 4" 4.0 Circular Tangent Polyurethane Fixed .37, .51, .59, .67, .75" Fixed .75, 1.0, 1.25, 1.5, 1.75" 50,75 Victaulics on inlet and overflow, polyurethane will withstand 185F, 3-piece cone, manifolds available with 3-16 or more cones Victaulics on inlet and overflow, polyurethane will withstand 185F, 3-piece cone, manifolds available with 1-3 cones
10"
10.0
Rectangular Tangent
Polyurethane
500,75
Permathane Ind. (see Wren Sales (92) Ltd.) Quality Solids Separation Co. 4" Model 240 3.813 Rectangular Tangent Polyurethane top section & aluminum alloy Adjust .25 to .625" body with polyurethane liner Polyurethane top section with aluminum Adjust .5 to 1.0" alloy body with polyurethane liner Aluminum housing with aluminum bronze cone top and feed nipple, cone liner and vor- Fixed 1.75, 2.0, 2.25" tex finder made of hycar rubber, apex lined with polyurethane 50,75 Retrofit the Pioneer Siltmaster 4" and Economaster 4" cones and Sweco 4" cone, manifolds available with 4-24 4" cones, victaulics on inlet and overflow Retrofit the Pioneer Sandmaster 6" or Economaster 6" cones, manifolds available with 3-12 6" cones, victaulics on inlet and overflow
.24
6" Model 260
6.0
Rectangular Tangent
100,75
12" Model 212
12.0
Circular Tangent
500,75
Retrofits the Pioneer 12" Volumemaster cone, manifolds available with 1-4 12" cones, victaulics on inlet and overflow
RETSCO (formerly Demco hydrocyclone line) 2" 3" 4" 4H 2.25 3.1 4.0 4.87 Circular Tangent Circular Tangent Circular Tangent Circular Tangent Cast Iron Cast Iron Cast Iron Polyurethane4 .3, .18" .44, .3, .2" .55, .44, .3, .2" .69, .44, .3, .2" 20,75 27,75 42,75 76,752 Flanged inlet and overflow, buna or urethane cone liners available Flanged inlet and overflow, urethane liner Flanged inlet and victaulic on overflow, manifolds available with 2-24 cones Flanged inlet, victaulic on overflow, orifice control plate. Also available in ductile iron. Manifolds available with 2-24 cones

Proprietary: - for the exclusive use of Chevron Corporatin and other wholly owned subsidiaries of Chevron Corporation. a b c d e f Flow Rate5 at Rec. Head (gpm,ft) 156,75 640,75 400,75 g
Mfg. &1 Model 8" 10" 12"
Cone Diam. (in.) 6.95 10.2 12.81
Inlet Type Circular Tangent Rectangular Involute Circular Tangent
Cone Construction Cast Iron Polyurethane4 Cast Iron
Underflow Adjustment .73, .44, .3, .2" 1.5" Fixed Adjustable Valve
Special Features/Comments Flanged inlets, overflow manifolds available with 1-8 cones, available in either vertical or inclined mounting 3-piece cone with victaulics on inlet and overflow manifolds available with 1-4 cones Orifice control valve, manifolds available with 1-4 cones in either vertical or inclined mounting
Schiffner (some Schiffner 2" and 4" cones available in US from Spike Enterprises) Smith International Drilco Division (Discontinued cyclone product line.) Swaco Geolograph 1.97 2" Microclone Rectangular Tangent Ceramic 50 mm 2" Microclone 2.3 Rectangular Tangent Polyurethane4 4" Twin Cone 4.04 Double 12.1 Rectangular Tangent Polyurethane4 Polyurethane4
Fixed .25" Bit Nozzle Fixed .5"
25,125 25,125
20-cone manifolds Ceramic liner in apex, 20-cone manifolds 63 gpm at 75 ft feed head2, manifolds available with 8-20 4" cones Manifolds available with 1, 2, or 3 cones in either vertical or slant mounting, 4-piece cone
.25
Fixed .375 (most common) 69,912 .5, .625" Fixed .5, .75 (most common) 1.25, 1.5" 500,75
12"
Circular Tangent
Cones formerly available from Geolograph Pioneer 3" Solidsmaster 3" Economaster 4" Siltmaster 4" Economaster 4" HV Economaster 6" Sandmaster 6" Economaster 12" Volumemaster 12" Economaster 3.0 3.75 3.75 3.75 6 6 12.0 11.75 Square Tangent Circular Tangent Circular Tangent Rectangular Tangent Ramp Circular Tangent Rectangular Tangent Circular Tangent Rectangular Tangent Cast Iron Polyurethane4 Cast Iron Polyurethane4 Polyurethane4 Cast Iron Polyurethane4 Cast Iron Polyurethane4 top Adjust .25 to .625" Adjust .25 to .625" Adjust .25 to .75" Adjust .5 to 1.0" Adjust up 1.0" Fixed 1.75, 2.0, 2.25" Adjustable .75 to 2.25" 22,75 22,75 48,752 48,752 80,75 100,75 100,75 500,75 500,75 Manifolds available with 3-12 6" cones, 2-piece cone Manifolds available with 3-12 6" cones, 2-piece cone Manifolds available with 1-4 cones, 3-piece cone Manifolds available with 1-4 cones, 3-piece cone Manifolds available with 4-24 4" cones, 2-piece cone Manifolds available with 4-24 4" cones, 2-piece cone All cones have victaulics on inlet and overflow, all Economaster cones have an aluminum bottom with a replaceable polyurethane liner

Proprietary: - for the exclusive use of Chevron Corporatin and other wholly owned subsidiaries of Chevron Corporation. a b c d e f Flow Rate5 at Rec. Head (gpm,ft) g
Mfg. &1 Model Sweco 4" 5"
Cone Diam. (in.)
Inlet Type
Cone Construction
Special Features/Comments
3.785 4.875
Circular Tangent Circular Tangent
Polyurethane4 Polyurethane4
Adjust 0 to .620" Adjust 0 to .685"
52,752 80,75
10" Thompson Tool Co. 4"
10.0
Rectangular Volute
Polyurethane4
Variable to 1.5"
500,75
Manifolds available with 8-20 cones, 2-piece cone, victaulics on inlet and overflow 78 gpm at 60 ft feed head2, manifolds available with 23 or 16 cones, flange on inlet and victaulic on overflow, 2-piece cone 506 gpm at 60 ft feed head2, manifolds available with 1-3 vertically-mounted cones and with 2-3 slant-mounted cones, victaulics on inlet and overflow, 3-piece cone
4.25
Circular Tangent
Cast Iron w/liner
Automatic Adjust 0 to .625" Automatic Adjust 0 to 1.25"
8"
7.75
Circular Tangent
Cast Iron w/liner
40 gpm at 60 ft feed head2. Circular manifold, flanges on 45 gpm at 75 ft feed head2 inlet and 50 psi overflow, manifolds 50 gpm at 90 ft feed head2 available with 4-12 4" cones 176 gpm at 60 ft head2 Circular manifold, flanges 35-40 psi on 187 gpm at 75 ft head2 inlet and overflow, manifolds 196 gpm at 90 ft head2 with 1-4 8" cones 50,75 80,75 Victaulics on inlet and overflow, 2-piece cone Victaulics on inlet and overflow, 2-piece cone
.26
Thule Rigtech 4" PH4/LV ? ? 4" PH4/HV ? ? Totco (No longer in solids control business) Tri-Flo International, Inc.
Polyurethane? Polyurethane?
Adjust? Adjust?
2"
2.0
Rectangular Tangent
Polyurethane
Fixed .188"
15,81
4"
4.0
Rectangular Tangent
Polyurethane4
Adjust 0 to .5"
60,58
Victaulics on inlet and overflow, cutoff valves on inlets, individual overflows with patented control rod which acts as adjustable vacuum breaker for varying the wetness of the solids discharge, unit available with 20-2 cones Victaulics on inlet and overflow, cutoff valves on inlets, individual overflows with patented control rod which acts as adjustable vacuum breaker for varying the wetness of the solids discharge, units available with 8, 12, and 16-4 cones Victaulics on inlet and overflow, 3-piece cone, 17 gpm at 75 ft feed head2 Victaulics on inlet and overflows, 2 and 3-piece cones available
Wren Sales (92) Ltd. (Cones originally available from Permathane and then subsequently Morganite Canada, Inc.) 2" 4" 2.35 4.06 Circular Tangential Ramp Polyurethane4 Circular Tangential Ramp Polyurethane4 Fixed .2 to .375" Adjust 0 to .625" 16,65-70 39,75

Proprietary: - for the exclusive use of Chevron Corporatin and other wholly owned subsidiaries of Chevron Corporation. a b c d e f Flow Rate5 at Rec. Head (gpm,ft) 86,902 585,75 g
Mfg. &1 Model 5" 10"
Cone Diam. (in.) 5.00 10.25
Inlet Type
Cone Construction
Underflow Adjustment Adjust 0 to .625" Adjust .5 to 1.5"
Special Features/Comments Victaulics on inlet and overflows, 3-piece cone, 78 gpm at 75 ft feed head2 Victaulics on inlet and overflow, 3-piece cone
Circular Tangential Ramp Polyurethane4 Rectangular Volute Ramp Polyurethane4
NOTES: 1. Original Table compiled by Amocos Grant Young. 2. Value given is per Amocos Grant Young. 3. Value given is manufacturers recommended feed head. 4. Polyurethane is moca-cured type which has a higher temperature stability which is needed for mud temperatures in the 175-200 F range. 5. Value given is per Manufacturer except as otherwise noted.
.27
Table E.6 Oilfield Mud Cleaners

a b c d Size2 (in.) e Rec. Head (ft) f Capacity (gpm) g h i j k l Total Area (sq. ft) m Screen Vibrator6 n Speed (rpm) o Number of Screen4 Decks Screens Screen3 Angles Mtg.
Mfg. & Model
Manifold1
No.
Screen5 Tension
Comments
Brandt (Division of Drexel Oilfield Services, Inc.) Mud Cleaner 1 8 4 PU 75 400 1 1 Fixed 0 N.A. P.T. 45x52=16. 25 B.D. 1356 Reflux line, feed gauge, siphon breaker standard. Self-cleaning sliders standard.
Chronaloy (No longer available) Mud Cleaner R 8 4" PU 80 8(87)=696 1 2 1 2 Fixed-5 Fixed-5 N.A. N.A. P.T. P.T. 16 32 I. I. 1800/3600 Individual cone overflows 1800/3600 each with siphon breaker, Krebs cones. Rotex shaker. Victaulic connections on all cones.
Demco Siltrite (now available from RETSCO) 4MC6 I 6 4"H C.I. 90-100 480_14 ppg 240 14-18 ppg 1 1 0-10 Adjust 0 to -10 O.S. N.P.T. Spring Loaded 11 B.D. 1400 Cone inlets flanged, Victaulics on overflow, see units available with either metal or urethane cones. Cone inlets flanged. Cone inlets flanged. Cone inlets flanged. Cone inlets flanged. Cone inlets flanged.
1280 14 ppg 640 14018 ppg
.28
4MC8 4MC10 4MC12 4MC14 4MC16
I I I I I
8 10 12 14 16
4"H C.I. 4"H C.I. 4"H C.I. 4"H C.I. 4"H C.I.
90-100 600 14 ppg 300 14018 ppg 90-100 800 14 ppg 400 14-18 ppg 90-100 960 14 ppg 480 14018 ppg 90-100 1120 14 ppg 560 14018 ppg 90-100
1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1
Adjust 0 to -10 Adjust 0 to -10 Adjust 0 to -10 Adjust 0 to -10 Adjust 0 to -10
O.S. O.S. O.S. O.S. O.S.
N.P.T. Spring Loaded N.P.T. Spring Loaded N.P.T. Spring Loaded N.P.T. Spring Loaded N.P.T. Spring Loaded
11 16.5 16.5 22 22
B.D. B.D. B.D. B.D. B.D.
1400 1400 1400 1400 1400
Derrick
R R R
8 16 20
4" PU 4" PU 4" PU
75 75 75
8(50)=400 16(50)=800 20(50)=1000
1 1 1
2 3 3
Adjust -1 to +5 Adjust -1 to +5 Adjust -1 to +5
O.S. O.S. O.S.
Ramp-Lok Spring Loaded Ramp-Lok Spring Loaded Ramp-Lok Spring Loaded
15.53 23.3 32.9
I. I. I.
1750 1750 1750
All cones have victaulic connections and 2" valves on inlets.
Table E.6 (Continued) Oilfield Mud Cleaners

a b c d Size2 (in.) 4" 4"HV 6" 3" PU e Rec. Head (ft) 75 75 75 75 f Capacity (gpm) 16(50)=800 16(80)=1280 8(100)=800 16(22)=352 g h i j k l Total Area (sq. ft) 12.57 12.57 12.57 12.57 m Screen Vibrator6 B.D. B.D. B.D. B.D. n Speed (rpm) 0-1450 0-1450 0-1450 0-1450 o Number of Screen4 Decks Screens Screen3 Angles Mtg. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Fixed 0 Fixed 0 Fixed 0 Fixed 0 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
Mfg. & Model Geolograph-Pioneer Mud Cleaner (now Swaco Geolograph)
Manifold1 R R R R
No. 16 16 8 16
Screen5 Tension P.T. P.T. P.T. P.T.
Comments All Economaster cones with plastic upper and urethane lined aluminum lower section. Head gauge. All cones have victaulic connections. Screens interchangeable with Sweco. All units variable speed, variable eccentricity. 5" cone inlets flanged.
Harrisburg Mud Cleaner MC-800 Hutchinson-HayesRhumba Mud Cleaner NL Bariod Mud Cleaner (now available from Bird Machine Co.) Oiltools Mud Cleaner
10
5" PU
75
10(80)=800
Fixed -4
O.S.
N.P.T. Spring Loaded both N.P.T. Spring Loaded N.P.T. Not Spring Loaded
42x60 = 2520 in2 17.5 28
B.D.
1500
10
5" PU
75
10(80)=800
Fixed -6
O.S.
B.D.
2100
5" cone inlets flanged.
5" PU
75
700
Adjust +2 to -2
O.S.
12
B.D.
1610
All cones have victaulic connections on feed & overflow. Self-cleaning sliders.
.29
4" PU
75
400
Fixed 0
N.A.
P.T.
12.57
1800 1500
Quality Solids Separation Co. Mud Cleaner Model Q48R Swaco Mud Cleaner 4T4 6T4 6T4SS 8T4SS Sweco Mud Cleaner I I I I 8 12 12 16 8 4" PU 4" PU 4" PU 4" PU 4" PU 96 96 96 96 600 850 950 1200 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 2 2 1 2 Fixed 0, -5 Fixed 0, -5 Fixed 0 Fixed 0 O.S. O.S. O.S. O.S. N.A. N.A. N.P.T. Spring Loaded N.P.T. Spring Loaded N.P.T. Spring Loaded N.P.T. Spring Loaded P.T. P.T. 12 12 32 32 12.57 25.14 B.D. B.D. B.D. B.D. I I 1750 1750 1140 1140 1800 1800 1 8 16 6" PU 4" PU 75 75 800 800 1 1 Fixed 0 N.A. P.T. 12.5 B.D. 1200 1750 All cones have victaulics on feed and overflow. All cones have flanged inlets. Mini-Shaker Mini-Shaker Super Screen Super Screen Self-cleaning sliders. Double tub unit. Manifolds with 10 & 12 cones available. Also available with 5" cones.
9.0/357 8(50)=400 11.0/40 18.0/55
Table E.6 (Continued) Oilfield Mud Cleaners

a b c d Size2 (in.) 4" PU 4" PU 4" PU e Rec. Head (ft) 75 f Capacity (gpm) 400 800 1280 g h i j k l Total Area (sq. ft) 16.0 m Screen Vibrator6 H.M.D.6 n Speed (rpm) o Number of Screen4 Decks Screens Screen3 Angles Mtg. 1 2 Adjust 4.5" up on discard end. N.A.
Mfg. & Model Thule VSM 200
Manifold1 I
No. 8 16 16
Screen5 Tension P.T.
Comments
900-2000 Upper deck can be added for saving LCM. 4 Pioneer Economaster fitted at customer's request. 1750 EVS 24 shaker. Victaulic connection on cone inlet and overflow.
Totco (Milchem) Mud Cleaner
10
4" PU
75
500
Fixed -8.5, -11.5, -12.5
O.S.
N.P.T. Spring Loaded
24
B.D.
Totco (Milchem) MudMaster Mud Cleaner Tri-Flo Fluid Separators TFI-8
10
4" PU
75
500
Fixed 0
O.S.
N.P.T. Spring Loaded both sides
40
I., I.
900
4" PU
20 psi 520 for any mud weight
Adjust -5 to +2 Fixed 0, -5
O.S.
N.P.T. Spring Loaded both sides N.P.T. Spring Loaded both sides N.P.T. Non-Spring Loaded
B.D.
1750
Feed inlet valves and individual overflows with control valves. Victaulic connections on cone inlets and overflows. Triton NNF Screening Machine with bolt-on 16-cone desilter.
.30
TFI-16 I 16
4" PU
20 psi
1040
O.S.
12
B.D.
1750
for any mud weight Triton Linear Mud Cleaner NOTES: 1. R means radial and I means in-line. 2. PU means polyurethane, C.I. means cast iron, and HV means high volume. 3. Negative angles means the screen slopes downward from the feed end, and positive angles means upward slopes. 4. O.S. means overslung and U.S. means underslung. N.A. means not applicable. 5. N.P.T. means nonpretensioned and P.T. means pretensioned. 6. B.D. means belt-driven and I. means integral, H.M.D. means hydraulic motor driven. 7. Manufacturer recommends given pressures for given mud weights. I 16 3"-5 75 3"-800 4"-800 5"-1280 1 3 Adjust -1 to +5 O.S.
27.4
I., I.
1728
Table E.7 Oilfield Centrifuges

a b c Rotating2 Model1 Assembly Bowl Size Materials of Bowl/Conveyor (in.) Construction Differential Gearbox Ratio Speed Range (RPM) RPM/Gs8 Drive3 Mud4 Pump Capacity6 Mud Wt/GPM d e f g h i j k
Mft. &
Comments
Alfa-Laval 414
14"x36 Contour 14"x56 Contour 14"x56 Contour
SS
Adjust w/single lead conveyor
57/1
1500-3400
1500/447 2500/1243 3400/2299 1500/447 2500/1243 3400/2299 2000/795 3000/1790 4000/3182
P.D.
9.0/100 11.0/80 14.0/60 9.0/150 11.0/100 14.0/70 9.0/150 11.0/100 14.0/70
418
SS
57/1
1500-3400
P.D.
418
SS
57/1
0-4000
P.D.
Baker Hughes Treatment Services (marketing Baroid line of solids equipment.)
.31
Standard Mud Centrifuge
18"x28 Conical
CS Standard
Fixed with double lead conveyor
80/1
1300-1800
1300/432 1800/828
DH, EH
P.D.
9.0/45 12-14/20 14-16/15 >16/10 17.0/10 9.0/25-150
High Volume Centrifuge
24"x38 Contour
CS Standard
Fixed with single 140/1 or lead conveyor 80/1
Variable 1000-2500
1500/767 1800/1104 2300/1803 2500/2/31
P.D. or Centrifugal
Bird Machine Co. Note: Bird has supplied 18"x28's (conical & contour) & 24"x38's (contour) to Pioneer, Baroid, Milchem (Totco), & Brandt (Drexel). Also 24"x45 (contour) to Derrick. Bird offers a variety of centrifuges applicable to the oilfield. Broadbent, Inc. Compact Unit
18"x28 Contour
CS Standard
80/1
1000-2400
1000/256 1500/575 2000/1022 2400/1472
P.D.
10.0/65
Options available for all Broadbent centrifuges include variable bowl speeds, variable bowl/conveyor differentials, and a choice of abrasion protection materials for conveyors.
High Volume Standard
24"x38
CS Standard
130/1 or 80/1
1000-2400
1000/341 1500/767 2000/1363 2400/1963
P.D.
10.0/130
Brandt (Division of Drexel Oilfield Services)
Table E.7 (Continued) Oilfield Centrifuges

Proprietary: - for the exclusive use of Chevron Corporatin and other wholly owned subsidiaries of Chevron Corporation. a b c Rotating2
1
Mft. & Model Rotosep

1
Assembly Bowl Size Materials of Bowl/Conveyor (in.) Construction Differential

6" rotor
Gearbox Ratio N.A.

2
Speed Range (RPM)

Fixed 2300
RPM/Gs8
2300/451
Drive3
D or E
Mud4 Pump P.D.
Capacity6 Mud Wt/GPM

15-28 gpm
Comments Same as Totco RMS Centrifuge, except Rotosep has tungsten carbide seals. Manufactured by Bird Machine Co.
CS Standard
N.A.
CF-1
18"x28 Contour
CS
Fixed with single 40/1 lead conveyor
1600-2000 Rec 1650 usually
1600/654 1650/696 2000/1022
P.D. or Centrifugal Pump
unwtd/100 9.0/90 12.0/60 16.0/30 18.0/25 unwtd/175 9.0/150 12.0/60 16.0/30 18.0/25 9.0/140 12.0/85 15.0/25 18.0/15
CF-2
24"x38 Contour
CS
1400-2000 Rec 1450 usually 1900
1400/668 2000/1363
P.D. or Centrifugal Pump
Manufactured by Bird Machine Co.
HS-3400
14"x49.5 Contour
SS Standard
1750-4000 2900 normally
1750/609 2400/1145 2900/1672 3500/2435 4000/3181
P.D.
Manufactured by Sharples. Patented tungsten carbide tiling on conveyor for abrasion resistance.
.32
Broadbent, Inc. High Volume High Speed

22"x54
CS Standard
130/1 or 80/1
1000-3200
1000/312 1500/703 2000/1250 2500/1953 3200/3199
P.D.
10.0/230 14.0/90
Derrick Equipment Co. DS1 (Sharples 3400) DE 1000

14"x49 Contour 14"49 Contour 24"x45 Contour 24"x38 Contour
SS
Fixed with single 52/1 lead conveyor Fixed with single 52/1 or lead conveyor 125/1 Fixed with single 80/1 lead conveyor Fixed with double lead conveyor 80/1 or 130/1
1800-3250
1800/644 2500/1243 3250/2100 1800/644 2500/1243 3250/2100 1500/767 2000/1363 2400/1963 1500/767 2000/1363 2400/1963
P.D. or Centrifugal P.D. or Centrifugal P.D. or Centrifugal P.D. or Centrifugal
9.0/150 17.0/20 9.0/150 17.0/20 9.0/230
Carbide tiles on conveyor.
SS
1800-3250
Carbide tiles on entire length of conveyor.
DB1 (Bird)
SS
1500-2400 1600 usually 1500-2400
DB2 (Bird, Bird-Broadbent, Broadbent)
CS & SS
9.0/150

Proprietary: - for the exclusive use of Chevron Corporatin and other wholly owned subsidiaries of Chevron Corporation. a b c Rotating2 Model1 Assembly Bowl Size Materials of Bowl/Conveyor (in.) Construction Differential
18"x28 Contour
Mft. &
Gearbox Ratio 80/1
Speed Range (RPM)

1600-2000
RPM/Gs8
1600/654 2000/1022
Drive3
E
Mud4 Pump P.D. or Centrifugal P.D. or Centrifugal P.D. or Centrifugal

9.0/80 17.0/10
Comments
DB3 (Bird)
CS
DS2 (Sharples 3000) DDO (Dorr Oliver)
14"x30 Contour 16"x49 Contour
SS
Fixed with single 52/1 lead conveyor Adjust 10-150 RPM 35/1
2000-3250
2000/795 2500/1243 3250/2100 1800/736 3000/2045 4000/3635
9.0/120 17.0/30 9.0/100
Carbide tiles on conveyor.
SS
1800-4000
DFE/Solids Control (DFE purchased Bariod's line of solids control equipment; DFE sold to Reserve Pits, Inc. who sold to Baker Hughes Treatment Services; see Baker Hughes Treatment Services/Bird Machine Co.) Flo-Trend
.33
Model ? Model ?
(same as Hutchison-Hayes Model 1430) (same as Hutchison-Hayes Model 1448)
Geolograph-Pioneer (Merged with Swaco; now Swaco Geolograph.) Decantmaster Standard

18"x28 Conical
CS Standard
Fixed with double lead conveyor Fixed with double lead conveyor Fixed with double lead conveyor
80/1
1500-2000
1500/575 2000/1022
DH, EH, or E P.D.
9.0/10-50 10.0/35.0 17.0/10.1
Pioneer Centrifuges were manufactured by Pioneer. Patented conveyor gauging system for all units. Backdrive with variable scroll speed available for all units.
Decantmaster Mark I Decantmaster Mark II
18"x28 Contour
CS Standard
80/1
1500-2000
1500/575 2000/1022
DH, EH, or E P.D.
9.0/20-150 10.0/70.0 17.0/20.2 9.0/20-200 10.0/70.0 17.0/20.2
18"x48 Contour
CS Standard
80/1
1500-2000
1500/575 2000/1022
DH, EH, or E P.D. or Cen-
trifugal
Hutchison-Hayes Intl., Inc. Model 1430

14"x30 Contour
SS Standard
2000-4000
2000/795 3250/2100 4000/3181
P.D. Diaphragm pump
9.0/20-100 10.0/60 17.0/9
Manufactured by Hutchison-Hayes. Weighted mud capacities at 2100 g's. Slightly higher capacities at lower g levels.

1
Mft. & Model Model 1448

14"x48 Contour
Gearbox Ratio
Speed Range (RPM)

2000-4000
RPM/Gs8
2000/795 3250/2100 4000/3181
Drive3
E
Mud4 Pump P.D. Diaphragm pump

9.0/20-100 10.0/60 17.0/9
Comments Manufactured by Hutchison-Hayes. Weighted mud capacities at 2100 g's. Slightly higher capacities at lower g levels. Manufactured by Hutchison-Hayes. Weighted mud capacities at 2100 g's. Slightly higher flows at lower g levels.
SS Standard
Model 5500
16"x55 Contour
SS Standard
Fixed or Variable single lead conveyor
53/1
2000-3250
2000/909 3050/2114 3250/2400
P.D. or Centrifugal
9.0/250 10.0/205 17.0/32
Hytech Centrifuges, Inc. Hysep MD 43 (previously 142)

16"x50 Contour
CS & SS
Adjust 1-70 RPM 40/1
Max 2800 1500 or 2000 on some units
1500/575 2000/1022 2780/1975
E, H
P.D.
9.0/100 12.0/50 15.0/35 18.0/20
Manufactured by M & J in Denmark. Conveyor can run approx. 30 RPM faster than bowl, if desired. Patented dual conveyor design. Manufactured by M & J in Denmark. Conveyor can run approx. 30 RPM faster than bowl, if desired. Patented dual conveyor design. Manufactured by M & J in Denmark. New 4:1 single scroll with unique acceleration feed chamber. Manufactured by M & J in Denmark. New 4:1 single scroll with unique acceleration feed chamber.
.34
Hysep MD 53 (previously 152)
20"x69 Contour
CS & SS
Max 2400
2400/1636
E, H
P.D.
9.0/160 10.0/125 12.0/65 15.0/45 18.0/30 9.0/135 10.0/95 12.0/75 18.0/35 9.0/200 10.0/165 12.0/105 18.0/45
Hysep MD 44
16"x64
SS & Duplex
Max 3600
3600/2945
E, H
P.D.
Hysep MD 54
20"x80
CS & SS
Max 2400
2400/1636
E, H
P.D.
NL Bariod (Bariod sold its line of solids control equipment to DFE/Solids Control who sold to Baker Hughes Treatment Services; see Baker Hughes Treatment Services.) Oiltools (No longer in solids control business in USA.)

18"x54 Con- CS Stantour, dard/SS Counter-Current or Co-Current
Mft. & S2-1G
Gearbox Ratio Hydraulically Variable 0-60
Speed Range (RPM)

0-3400
RPM/Gs8
Drive3
E
Mud4 Pump P.D.

up to 70 gpm
Comments S2-1G manufactured by Humboldt. WATER DILUTION MUST NOT BE USED WITH CO-CURRENT MODEL. Co-Current model not recommended for weighted muds. S3-0G manufactured by Humboldt. WATER DILUTION MUST NOT BE USED WITH CO-CURRENT MODEL. Co-Current model not recommended for weighted muds.
Hydraulically variable with single lead conveyor
S3-0G
20"x60 Con- CS Stantour, dard/SS Counter-Current or Co-Current
Hydraulically variable with single lead conveyor
Hydraulically Variable 0-60
0-2600
P.D.
up to 97 gpm
.35
Quality Solids Separation Co. Q30

18"x28 Conical
CS Standard
Fixed with double lead conveyor Fixed with double lead conveyor Fixed with double lead conveyor
80/1
1500-2000
1500/575 2000/1022
P.D.
9.0/0-75 10.0/35 17.0/10.1 9.0/100 10.0/70 17.0/15 9.0/200 10.0/150 17.0/15
Automatic self-cleaning on shutdown. Automatic self-cleaning on shutdown. Automatic self-cleaning on shutdown.
Q100
18"x28 Contour
CS Standard
80/1
1500-2000
1500/575 2000/1022
P.D. or Centrifugal P.D. or Centrifugal
Q200
18"x50 Contour
CS Standard
80/1
1500-2000
1500/575 2000/1022
Sharples, Inc.7 P-1000

14"x22
SS
Not manufactured any longer.

1
Mft. & Model PM20000 (P-3000)

14"x30.9 Contour
Gearbox Ratio
Speed Range (RPM)

2600-4000
RPM/Gs8
2600/1344 3250/2100 4000/3181 2600/1344 3250/2100 4000/3181
Drive3
E
Mud4 Pump P.D. preferred

9.0/100 10.0/90 11.0/60 17.0/20 9.0/180 10.0/170 11.0/100 17.0/15-20
Comments Comments for Sharples Centrifuges (excluding P-1000): Sharples centrifuges have axial flow conveyors and tungsten carbide tiles on conveyors for abrasion resistance. P series is older & does not have axial flow and tungsten carbide tiles as standard.
SS
PM30000 (P-3400)
14"x49.4 Contour
SS
2600-4000
P.D. preferred
PM35000 PM40000 (P-4600) PM50000 (P-4800)
16.75"x49.4 SS Contour 20"x50.3 Contour 20"x76.4 Contour
SS SS Fixed with single 47/1 or lead conveyor 95/1

2000-3200 2000/1136 2550/1847 2800/2227 3200/2908 E
Centrifugal
9.0/425 10.0/425 11.0/300 17.0/100
.36
PM55000 PM60000 (P-5000) PM70000 (P-5400)
24"x76 Contour 25"x65 Contour 25"x90 Contour
SS SS SS Same as PM70000 except for length. Fixed with single 47/1 or lead conveyor 95/1
1800-300 1800/1150 2250/1797 2500/2219 3000/3195 E
Centrifugal
9.0/700 10.0/630 11.0/400 17.0/130
Spike Enterprises, Inc. Bird

18"x28 Conical
CS Standard
80/1
1500-2000
1500/575 2000/1022
EH, E
Centrifugal
90/10-40 10.0/30 17.0/5-10 9.0/150 10.0/100
Broadbent
24"x38 Contour
CS Standard
Fixed single and 80/1 130/1 fixed double lead conveyor Fixed single and 80/1 fixed double lead conveyors 9 degrees
1000-2400
1000/341 1500/767 2000/1363 2400/1963 1800/1104 2000/1363 2400/1963
E, D
Centrifugal
Bird
24"x38 Cylinder
SS
1000-2400
Centrifugal
9.0/120 10.0/85

Mft. & Bird
Gearbox Ratio 80/1
Speed Range (RPM)

1000-2400
RPM/Gs8
1800/1104 2000/1363 2400/1963 1800/1104 2000/1363 2500/2130 800/291 1200/654 1700/1313 1800/1150 2250/1797 2500/2219 3000/3195
Drive3
E
Mud4 Pump Centrifugal

9.0/120 10.0/85 9.0/250 10.0
Comments
CS, SS
Fixed single lead conveyor
Bird
CS Standard
Fixed with 6" 80/1 SW, 6 lead conveyor Fixed with single 80/1 lead conveyor Fixed with single 47/1 or lead conveyor 95/1
1800-2500
Centrifugal
Bird
SS Standard
800-1700 variable 1800-3000
Diesel Direct E
Centrifugal
9.0/450
Sharples P-5400
SS
Centrifugal
9.0/700 10.0/630 11.0/300 17.0/100
Tungsten carbide tiles on conveyor just before feed inlet to solids discharge end; no axial flow conveyor.
.37
Swaco Geolograph (Swaco & Geolograph-Pioneer merged.) Model 414 Centrifuge Model 518 High Speed Centrifuge Model 518 High Speed Centrifuge Mark I Mark II Sweco SC-2
SS Standard
Adjust (3 settings) w/single lead conveyor Adjust (3 settings) w/single lead conveyor Adjust (3 settings) w/single lead conveyor
60/1
1600-3250
1600/509 1800/644 2500/1243 2500/1243 3250/2100
P.D. Centrifugal Centrifugal
9.0/0-60 11.0/40 17.0/17 8.5/90 9.0/75 10.0/60 9.0/250 9.5/200 10.0/150
Swaco 414 & 518 centrifuges manufactured by Swaco Geolograph. Model 518 not designed for weighted muds. Model 518 not designed for weighted muds.
14"x56 Contour
SS
60/1
1600-3250
14"x56 Contour
SS
60/1
1900
1900/718
Centrifugal
(Same as Geolograph-Pioneer Mark I.) (Same as Geolograph-Pioneer Mark II.)
CS Standard SS Available CS Standard SS Available
Double lead 59/1 Fixed or variable conveyor Double lead 59/1 Fixed or variable conveyor
1350-2250
1350/466 2250/1294
P.D. or Centrifugal P.D. or Centrifugal
9.0/200
Manufactured by Sweco. Backdrive for variable conveyor speed avail. Manufactured by Sweco. Backdrive for variable conveyor speed avail.
SC-4
24"x40 Contour
1150-1950 1550 typ.
1150/451 1350/621 1950/1296
9.0/280

1
Mft. & Model Z-34

14"x56 Contour
Gearbox Ratio
Speed Range (RPM)

2000-3500
RPM/Gs8
2000/795 3500/2435
Drive3
E
Mud4 Pump P.D. or Centrifugal P.D. or Centrifugal P.D. or Centrifugal P.D. or Centrifugal P.D. or Centrifugal P.D. or Centrifugal

9.0/100
Comments Manufactured by Flottweg. Backdrive for variable conveyor speed.
CS Standard SS Available CS Standard
Single lead vari- 140/1 able conveyor Fixed with double lead conveyor Fixed with double lead conveyor 80/1
Omega Mark I
18"x28 Contour
1350-2000
1350/466 2000/1022
E or DH
9.0/150
Omega Mark II
18"x48 Contour
CS Standard
80/1
1350-2000
1350/466 2000/1022
9.0/200
NX 329
20"x62 Contour
SS Standard
Single lead vari- 143/1 able axial flow conveyor Variable Double 140/1 Conveyor Fixed with single 141/1 lead conveyor
1350-2400
1350/518 2400/1636
9.0/150
Manufactured by Alfa Laval.
.38
643 P3400
16"x54
CS Standard CS or SS
1350-2500
1350/414 2500/1420 2000/795 2500/1243 3000/1789
9.0/125
Manufactured in Denmark by GVS. Manufactured by Sharples.
14"x50
up to 3000
9.0/100
RMS Totco (Milchem) (Totco no longer in solids control business.) RMS Centrifuge1 HV 18
6" rotor
(same as Totco Milchem RMS Centrifuge)
CS Standard CS Standard
N.A.2 Fixed with double lead conveyor Fixed with double lead conveyor
N.A.2 80/1
Fixed 2300
2300/451
D or E
P.D. Centrifugal
15-28 gpm
Developed by Mobil in 60's, portable, does not decant. HV 18 manufactured by Broadbent. HV 24 manufactured by Broadbent.
18"x28 Contour
1800-2000
1800/828 2000/1022
9.0/70 10.0/50 19.0/20 9.0/150 10.0/120 19.0/50
HV 24
24"x38 Contour
CS Standard
130/1
1600-1800
1600/872 1800/1104
Centrifugal
Tri-Flo International, Inc. Alfa-Laval 418

14"x56 Contour
SS Standard
Adjust (5 set160/1 tings) with single lead conveyor
1500-3400 2800 typical
1500/447 2800/1559 3400/2298
E 50HP
PD
9.0/140 for 1800-1900 9.0/75 for 2800 RPM
Not designed for weighted muds.

Mft. &
Gearbox Ratio
Speed Range (RPM)

1638-1850
RPM/Gs8
1638/914 1850/1166 2800/1670
Drive3
E
Mud4 Pump Centrifugal PD

9.0/185
Comments Manufactured by Humboldt.
Humboldt SCS/142
CS Standard CS
Fixed with single 25/1 lead conveyor Variable with N.A. double lead conveyor Variable with N.A. double lead conveyor
2800 variable
EH 50 HP
8.5/60
SCS/152
19.5"x62 Contour
CS
2400 variable
2400/1595
EH 50 HP
PD
8.5/100
Wagner International, Ltd. (merged with Wadeco) Sigma 100

18"x28 Contour
CS Standard
80/1
2000 typical
2000/1022
E 50HP
Centrifugal
8.5/125 9.5/80 10.5/60 8.5/175 9.1/140 9.5/120 10.0/65 8.5/300
.39
Sigma 150
18"x48 Contour
CS Standard
Fixed with dou- 80/1 ble lead conveyor; axial flow Fixed with single 49/1 lead conveyor; axial flow; STC tiles Fixed with single 47.5/1 lead conveyor; axial flow; STC tiles
2000 typical
2000/1022
E 50HP
Centrifugal
Sharples PM40000
20"x50 Contour
CS &/or SS
2800 typical
2800/2226
E 100HP
Centrifugal
Sintered Tungsten Carbide tiles (STC) on conveyor for abrasion resistance. Sintered Tungsten Carbide tiles (STC) on conveyor for abrasion resistance.
Sharples PM60000
25"x65 Contour
SS
2500 typical
2500/2218
E 200HP
Centrifugal
8.5/400
NOTES: 1. All centrifuges are decanters except Totco (Milchem) RMS Centrifuge which is a perforated rotor centrifuge. 2. CS means carbon steel, SS means stainless steel, N.A. means not applicable. 3. DH means diesel-hydraulic, EH means electric-hydraulic, D means diesel, and E means electric.

1
Mft. & Model
Gearbox Ratio
Speed Range (RPM)
RPM/Gs8
Drive3
Mud4 Pump
Comments 4. P.D. means positive displacement.
.40
5. Not available from manufacturer. 6. Values given are per manufacturer. 7. The PM Series Sharples centrifuges are newer versions of the older P series. Among the differences are axial flow conveyors with tungsten carbide tiles for abrasion resistance and 360 degree solids discharge. 8. G = .0000142 x Bowl Diameter (in.) x RPM2
Chapter 1. Introduction
All drilling personnel recognize the importance of mud in the successful drilling of a well. One of the primary uses for drilling fluid is to carry unwanted drilled solids from the borehole. These solids are essentially a contaminant and, if left in the mud, can lead to numerous operational problems. Three options are available to maintain acceptable drilling fluid properties: 1. Do nothing and let the solids build up. When the mud no longer meets specifications, throw it away and start with fresh mud. 2. Dilute the mud and rebuild the system to keep the properties within acceptable ranges, while dumping excess mud to the reserve pit. 3. Lower the solids content of the mud through solids removal to minimize the addition/dilution necessary to maintain acceptable properties. In recent years, increased public awareness of environmental issues has provided both regulatory and economic incentives to minimize drilling waste. In many instances, the first two choices have become very expensive and unacceptable. This has served to stress the importance of the third option, efficient solids control. Using solids removal to minimize addition/dilution volumes is normally most effective and provides the following benefits:
Increased penetration rates Reduced mud costs Lower water requirements Reduced torque and drag Less mixing problems Reduced system pressure losses Lower circulating density (ECD) Better cement jobs Reduced instances of lost circulation Reduced formation damage Less differential sticking Reduced environmental impact Less waste, lower disposal costs
It is apparent from this list that the role of solids control is instrumental in the maintenance of a good drilling fluid. Solids control equipment has been standard hard-
1.1
Introduction ware on most rotary drilling rigs since the early 1960s. In the early years, many of the solid/liquid separation devices were borrowed from other industries and applied directly to oilfield rotary drilling. Although the basic operating principles and technology associated with mechanical solids removal have not changed significantly over the years, refinements in design specifically for drilling applications have yielded considerable improvements in performance and reliability. This manual provides drilling personnel with the information to help optimize the selection and operation of solids control equipment. Emphasis is placed on mechanical solids removal equipment and the factors that impact its performance. Practical operating guidelines are provided to help achieve maximum performance in the field.
1.2
Chapter 10. Addition/Mixing Systems
All mud systems require a mixing system for the addition of viscosifiers, weighting agents and chemicals to maintain desired mud properties. The method and location chosen for addition can greatly impact material consumption and the resultant properties of the active system. For example, if bentonite is not completely hydrated before being pumped downhole, the viscosity of the mud at the flowline will be much higher than at the suction pit. Since viscosity negatively impacts solids control equipment performance, inadequate control of viscosity can lead to higher dilution volumes. Polymers present special mixing concerns to prevent the formation of fish-eyes; balls of dry polymer encapsulated by a thick, partially-hydrated layer. Unless properly wetted and sheared, a significant portion of the polymer will be lost at the shakers and increase polymer consumption. It is therefore important to ensure that additions are made correctly and in the right location.
Mixing Hoppers
The most common device used to add dry material to the mud is the venturi mud mixing hopper ( Figure 10.1). Fluid is supplied to the mixer by a centrifugal pump. The hopper device works by converting pressure head into velocity through a jet nozzle. The downstream venturi increases the shearing action and changes velocity head back into pressure head. Dry material is added where the jet stream crosses the gap between the nozzle and the venturi. Here, a low pressure area creates a slight vacuum. This vacuum, along with gravity, helps draw the material into the fluid stream. The high velocity and high shear rate of the fluid wets and disperses the dry material. To operate at maximum efficiency, both the nozzle and venturi must be correctly sized for the flowrate and head. This type of hopper is available from many manufacturers. Homemade versions, usually without a properly-designed venturi, are common. Another common mixing device is the Sidewinder hopper (Figure 10.2), manufactured by Swaco. The operation is much like a hydrocyclone. Fluid is pumped to a tangential inlet which allows pressure energy to be converted to centrifugal force. The spiraling fluid picks up the dry mud where it undergoes shear as it travels twice around the mixing chamber. As the fluid exits the hopper through a tangential outlet, the velocity is converted back into pressure head. Laboratory tests conducted with bentonite showed little difference between the two devices in both capacity and mixing capability as measured by the resultant mud rheology. Since the Sidewinder does not draw air into the hopper, dust can
10.1
Figure 10.1
Jet/Venturi Mixer. This design reduces dust but entrains more air into the fluid.
Figure 10.2
Sidewinder Mixer. This design does not entrain as much air as the venturi mixer, but creates more dust.
10.2
Addition/Mixing Systems be a problem when adding some materials. Conversely, the Mission Venturi hopper eliminated dust but entrained more air into the mud. Sizing of the jet nozzle and venturi are critical in obtaining maximum performance from venturi mixers; homemade versions should be avoided.
Bulk Systems
Bulk systems are economical for storing and distributing weighting material in large quantities. There is less waste and trash than when using sacked material. Bulk barite is stored in large vertical tanks, equipped with an air delivery system. Barite is drawn from the tank by a venturi to a bulk hopper which meters the material into the mud hopper. Bulk systems for other dry materials are becoming increasingly popular in offshore applications to eliminate handling and waste associated with sacked material. When consumption is not high enough to justify bulk tanks, hopper systems using 2200 lb big bags may be an alternative.
Polymer Mixing
Conventional mixing hoppers are not generally adequate for mixing and wetting dry polymers into viscous muds. Problems frequently arise when attempting to mix dry PHPA powder through conventional mixing hoppers regardless of whether the polymer is added directly to the active system or to a concentrated premix. Polymer fish-eyes, excessive viscosities, extensive mixing times and shaker screen blinding are commonly reported. These problems can be reduced by using a liquid form of the product, but liquid formulations contain less active polymer and use an oil as the carrier fluid. Work conducted on the characterization of polymers such as PHPA has led to the following conclusions regarding the mixing and shearing of polymers: 1. PHPA polymers marketed for use in drilling fluids may contain varying amounts of high molecular weight fractions. Viscosity is a function of molecular weight. Those products with a higher fraction of high molecular weight polymer will be harder to dissolve and generate higher viscosities. 2. Shear-degradation reduces the molecular weight of many polymers, especially PHPA. Higher shear rates produce lower molecular weights. Below a certain molecular weight, the inhibitive characteristics of PHPA are effectively lost. A mixing and shearing system consisting of a perforated-wafer type of jet shear mixer coupled with a SECO Homogenizer was found to provide improved mixing
10.3
Solids Control Manual and allow preparation of PHPA concentrations to 6 lb/bbl in a 50,000 mg/L chloride brine. The Flo Trend Jet Shear Mixer, pictured in Figure 10.3, directs fluid into a mixing chamber through opposing nozzle disks to impart turbulence and increase contact area. Polymer is added into the chamber through a conventional hopper. The mixture is then pulled into a venturi eductor, where further shearing and mixing occurs.
Figure 10.3
Jet Shear Mixer. Designs such as this can improve polymer mixing.
The SECO (Echols) homogenizer consists of a perforated ring that fits around the perimeter of the impeller blades in a centrifugal pump (Figure 10.4). Test conducted indicate that the SECO homogenizer produces sufficient shear to degrade the higher molecular weight fractions that make the product hard to dissolve, but will not shear-degrade below the molecular weight required for inhibition. The SECO is recommended for premixing polymer to reduce viscosity and elimination fish-eyes. Do not use this device for shearing weighted muds; the high solids content will quickly erode the perforations in the homogenizer ring. Also, barite may be degraded by the homogenizer. The following guidelines should be followed for building concentrated premix volumes:
10.4
Addition/Mixing Systems
Figure 10.4
SECO (Echols) Homogenizer Ring. Recommended for shearing polymers.
1. When possible, use brine instead of fresh water. Polymers will impart less viscosity in brine than in fresh water. 2. Mix supplemental material into the brine prior to adding the polymer. 3. After mixing the supplemental material, the total amount of polymer should be mixed through the jet shear mixer into the brine in a single pass. 4. After mixing the PHPA, the premix should be sheared through the homogenizer until stable rheological values are achieved.
Active System Addition

Dry products such as bentonite and barite should not be added, even through a hopper, at the suction compartment nor in the solids removal section. Addition should be made at least one compartment upstream of the suction compartment to allow time for the material to wet and disperse into the active system. Both these compartments must be well-agitated either by mechanical stirrers or mud
10.5
Solids Control Manual guns. Mud materials added at the suction can cause air entrainment at the rig pumps and increase the incidence of drill pipe corrosion.
Premix System
A premix system is a separate set of tanks with agitators and a hopper for batch mixing mud to desired specifications before addition to the active system. Premix systems are highly recommended for the advantages they provide: 1. Improved hydration and less air entrainment with dry solids addition. After mixing dry material in the premix tank, the mud can be agitated until the dry material is fully wetted. This also provides time for entrained air to break out of the mud. 2. Better control over active system mud properties. The properties of the premixed mud can be tailored to meet desired properties before transferal to the active system. Once properties in the premix have stabilized, the mud can be transferred over a complete circulation to ensure even mud properties in the active circulating system. 3. Less material consumption. With longer hydration and shearing time, premix tanks offer the benefit of maximizing the yield from bentonite and polymers before addition to the active system. Premix tanks are especially effective for polymer muds and almost essential for oil-based muds. Specialized shearing and mixing equipment (see Polymer Mixing) may be used on the premix tank to properly wet polymers at high concentrations and eliminate fish-eyes, thus reducing polymer consumption. 4. Easier to monitor dilution rates. The volumes added to the active system are usually much easier to monitor when transferring liquids of known quantity from a premix tank. The overall solids removal efficiency can be determined much more readily when accurate measurements can be made of dilution volumes and water additions. 5. Less manpower requirements. Since the premix is prepared in a batch process, material may be added much more quickly than when making additions over a complete circulation in the active system. Once the material has been added, the premix may be left to agitate and hydrate the slurry. After the desired properties have been achieved, the premix may be metered slowly into the active system. Both the
10.6
Addition/Mixing Systems hydration and transferral operations require minimum attention, thus freeing up manpower for other duties.
Water Addition
Dilution water is necessary in all water-based mud systems to maintain circulating volume and desired mud properties. Since the amount of dilution is directly linked to solids removal efficiency, the use of a water meter to monitor dilution volumes is strongly recommended. Water will be necessary on the rig floor, in the motor area, and may be required to help move discarded solids to the waste pit. Water must be supplied to the addition section and solids removal sections of the mud pits for both volume maintenance and cleaning. Since water must be supplied to almost every area on the rig, manifolding is obviously required. Ensure that the water meter is located to account for all water streams that will end up in the active system. Water should be recycled wherever possible. Remember that regardless of its purpose, any water used on and around the rig will contribute to the total liquid waste volume. This is especially important on locations where water supply or disposal costs are high. It is imperative that every water line be equipped with a valve and that no leaks are tolerated. Use low volume nozzles on the wash water lines. When possible, wash water should be collected and segregated from the cuttings disposal pit for recycling or for makeup water in the active system. Water should be added at the flowline when necessary to reduce the viscosity of the mud and allow finer screens to be used on the shakers. Any potential degradation in the cuttings size due to viscosity reduction is offset by the increased removal rate. Lower viscosity mud will also improve downstream degasser and hydrocyclone performance. Because centrifuge performance is sensitive to the viscosity of the feed mud, water addition at the centrifuge is usually necessary to achieve optimum performance. Since the centrifuge feed rate is usually much lower than other devices, the beneficial effect of water addition is proportionately greater at the centrifuge. Note, however, that dilution water added to the feed of the barite-recovery centrifuge is discharged with the centrate and does not contribute to dilution of the active system unless two-stage centrifuging is employed.
Waste Pit Water

In many instances, recycling water from the waste pit makes both economic and environmental sense. The following guidelines can significantly reduce overall rig water consumption:
10.7
Solids Control Manual 1. Recycle waste pit water to the shaker or centrifuge slides to help flow discarded solids back to the waste pit. 2. Use clean waste pit water as makeup water for the mud. Design the waste pit to access this fluid. This water must be checked for chemical compatibility before addition to the active system. 3. Use the waste pit water as dilution water for the barite-recovery centrifuge, provided the volume of colloidal solids in the water is low. 4. Segregate wash water and runoff water from the solid waste pit. This is especially important when using salt muds or oil-based muds to control waste pit remediation costs.
Agitation
Agitation is necessary to keep weight material suspended and ensure a homogeneous drilling fluid. Agitation also prevents solids buildup in the mud tanks. All removal compartments except the sand trap should be well-stirred. Mechanical (paddle type) stirrers are efficient mixers and are recommended, especially in the solids removal section. Mud guns impart shear which may degrade the drilled solids. Mechanical agitation ensures that the solids control equipment cannot be bypassed. Mud guns are acceptable in the Addition-Suction compartments downstream of the solids control equipment. In the addition section, mud guns may help shear and blend newly-added mud materials. Mechanical stirrers must be correctly sized. They must be large enough to adequately mix the fluid and not so large to cause aeration of the mud. The following method for sizing agitators was developed by the Brandt Company. This agitator sizing method is based on the desired turnover rate (TOR). The TOR is the time required, in seconds, for all of the fluid in the tank to move past the agitator blades: TOR = V t D 60 where: Vt D = = Tank volume in gallons (L x W x H, in feet x 7.481) Impeller displacement in gal/min (from Table 10.2)
The mud area to agitate should be divided into squares. For example, a 10 ft x 30 ft tank should be divided into 3 equal parts, each 10 ft x 10 ft. The TOR would be based on the volume of each 10 ft x 10 ft area.
10.8
Addition/Mixing Systems For proper agitation, the TOR should be between 35 and 90. A TOR less than 35 may result in vortices; a TOR over 90 will lead to solids settling. Table 10.1 gives the recommended TORs for various mud compartment uses. Table 10.1 Recommended Turnover Rates Tank Type Solids Removal Recommended TOR
50-75
Suction
65-85
Reserve
50-80
Pill
40-65
Agitator Design
1. Calculate volume, Vt, (gal). Vt = L x W x H, in feet x 7.481 gal/ft3. 2. From Table 10.1, determine the required TOR, (sec). 3. Calculate the required impeller displacement, D, (gpm). D = Vt x 60 / TOR 4. Choose an impeller from Table 10.2 with impeller displacement closest to the value calculated in Step 3. For tank depths > 5 ft, use a canted-blade (angled blade) impeller. Flat-blade (vertical blade) impellers may be used in shallower tanks. 5. Locate the impeller diameter corresponding to the chosen impeller displacement on Table 10.2. Using Figure 10.5 (Canted-Blade) or Figure 10.6 (Flat-Blade), enter the chart at the impeller diameter and follow the horizontal line until it intersects the maximum anticipated mud weight curve. Read the recommended horsepower. 6. Determine the recommended agitator shaft length from Table 10.3. 7. Canted-blade impellers should be located so that the distance between the tank bottom and the lower edge of the impeller blades is equal to 0.75 times the impeller blade diameter. Flat-blade impellers should be placed 6 in. above the bottom of the tank, or 2 in. above the bottom shaft stabilizer. 8. Baffles, as shown in Figure 10.7 are highly recommended for flat-bottomed tanks to help direct the flow towards the corners and eliminate dead areas in
10.9
the tank. A baffle is a steel plate 12 in. long, mounted on the tank floor and extending 6 in. above the top of the agitator blades. The baffles should be installed 6 in. from the agitator blade tips along a line from the agitator shaft to each corner of the compartment.
Agitator Sizing Example

Given: Suction Tank, 9 ft L x 7 ft W x 9 ft H 18 ppg mud
1. Vt = (9 x 7 x 9) x 7.481 = 4242 gal 2. Recommended TOR, from Table 10.1: 75 sec 3. Impeller Displacement Rate: D = (60) (4242)/75 = 3394 gpm 4. Since tank depth > 5 ft, a canted-blade impeller is selected. From Table 10.2, nearest D = 3764 gpm, Impeller Diameter = 32 in. 5. From Figure 10.6, for 32 in. diameter and 18 ppg mud, required agitator horsepower = 5 HP (MA5). 6. From Table 10.3, for model MA5 agitator and 9 ft tank depth, shaft length reduction = 10 in. Total Shaft Length = 9 ft x 12 in./ft - 10 in. = 98 in. 7. Impeller location above tank bottom = 0.75 x 32 = 24 in. 8. Total Agitator Weight = 98/12 x 15.1 lbs/ft + 580 lbs + 50 lbs = 753 lbs.
10.10
Addition/Mixing Systems Table 10.2 Impeller Displacement Rates

Diameter (in.)
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52
Weights (lbs)
11 15 19 21 38 50 61 74 101 118 126
Impeller Displacement Rate* GPM at 57.5 rpm (60 Hz) Canted-Blade

213 484 909 1645 2468 3764 5402 7284 9928 12512 16100
Impeller Displacement Rate GPM at 48 rpm (50 Hz) Canted-Blade

177 404 760 1373 2060 3142 4510 6081 8288 10445 13440
Flat-Blade
246 560 1051 1941 2839 4365 6273 8411 11300 14401 18630
Flat-Blade
205 467 877 1620 2370 3644 5237 7023 9435 12024 15552
* D = AB x V x 7.481 gal/ft3, where AB = projected blade area, ft3, V = impeller velocity, ft/min Cantedblade area based on 60 angle Brandt data
Table 10.3 Physical Specifications for Mechanical Mixers

Shaft Dia. (in.)
1-1/2 1-1/2 1-3/4 2-3/8 2-3/8 3 3 3-1/4 3-1/2
Model
HP
Minimum Impeller Dia. (in.)

12 20 24 28 32 32 36 40 40
Weight Shaft (lb/ft)

6.0 6.0 8.2 15.1 15.1 24.0 24.0 28.1 32.7
Shaft Length Reduction (in.)** Free

9 9 10 11-1/2 22-1/2 22-1/2 26-5/8 27 33 9 9 10 10 12 12 13-1/8 13-1/2 13-1/2
Agitator (lbs)
200 310 406 580 1200 1224 1830 1898 3130
Stabilized
MA1* MA2* MA3* MA5 MA7.5 MA10 MA15 MA20 MA25
1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0
* Bottom shaft stabilizer required at 6 ft, all others require bottom stabilizer at 8 ft. ** Shaft Length = Distance from tank bottom to top of agitator support beams - shaft length reduction. Brandt data
10.11
Figure 10.5
Horsepower Requirements for Canted-Blade Impellers (Courtesy of Brandt).
Figure 10.6
Horsepower Requirements for Flat-Blade Impellers (Courtesy of Brandt).
10.12
Addition/Mixing Systems
Figure 10.7
Floor Baffles. These are recommended to eliminate dead areas in flat-bottomed tanks.
10.13
Summary

Addition/mixing systems must be correctly designed to minimize material consumption and ensure complete and even mixing. The two most common mixing hoppers are the venturi type and the Sidewinder hopper. Laboratory tests conducted with bentonite showed little difference between the two devices in both capacity and mixing capability. The Sidewinder does not entrain air like the venturi hopper, but dust can be a problem when adding some materials. Bulk systems are economical for storing and distributing material required in large quantities. There is less waste and trash compared to sacked material. Bulk systems are also becoming popular for the accurate metering of dry material and chemicals in low dosages. Mixing polymers such as PHPA presents additional problems such as polymer fish-eyes, extensive mixing times, and shaker screen blinding. Polymers with a higher fraction of high molecular weight polymer will be harder to dissolve and generate higher viscosities. Higher shear rates produce lower molecular weights, but below a certain molecular weight, the inhibitive characteristics of PHPA are lost. A mixing and shearing system consisting of a perforated-wafer type of jet shear mixer, coupled with a SECO Homogenizer, was found to provide improved polymer mixing. Guidelines for building concentrated premix volumes are provided. Premix systems are highly recommended for the numerous advantages they provide: A. Improved hydration B. Better control over active system mud properties C. Less material consumption D. Easier to monitor dilution rates E. Less manpower requirements
All dilution water streams should be metered to monitor solids removal efficiency. Water should be added at the flowline to reduce viscosity and improve shaker performance. Any water used on the rig will contribute to the total liquid waste volume. No leaks should be tolerated. Use low volume nozzles on the wash water lines. Recycle water where possible. Mechanical (paddle type) agitators are recommended in the solids removal section of the active system. Mud guns are acceptable in the addition/suction compartments only. A procedure is provided to correctly size mechanical stirrers.
10.14
Chapter 11. Tank Design and Equipment Arrangements
Tank Design
The surface pits that comprise the active circulating system should be designed to contain enough usable mud to maintain mud properties and to fill the hole during a wet trip at the rigs maximum rated depth. Usable mud is defined as the mud volume which can be pumped before suction is lost. For example, a typical 10,000 ft well will normally require a minimum active system tank volume of 500 bbls. The active surface system can be divided into two sections: Solids Removal and Addition-Suction. All solids removal equipment and degassing occurs in the Solids Removal section. The Addition-Suction section is used to add fresh mud to the circulating system and provide sufficient residence time for proper mixing to occur before being pumped downhole. A slug tank is usually available to pump small pills such as LCM or barite slugs for tripping. Each section must be further divided into enough compartments to efficiently carry out its designed function. The number of compartments needed will depend upon the amount and type of solids removal equipment, system size and circulation rate. Each compartment must have enough surface area to allow entrained air to break out of the mud. A rule of thumb for the minimum surface area is calculated by: Area (sq ft) = Maximum Circulating Rate (GPM)/40 To maximize solids suspension and usable volume, the best tank shape is round with a conical bottom. Next best is a square or rectangular shape with a V-bottom. The least-preferred shape is the square or rectangular box with a flat bottom. The ideal tank depth is equal to the width or diameter of the tank. This design provides sufficient pump suction head and is best for complete stirring.
Compartment Equalization
Equalization height between compartments will depend upon the duty of the compartment. As a rule, an adjustable equalizer is needed only between the Solids Removal section and the Addition-Suction section. An adjustable swing-arm equalizer is recommended. Normally, the equalizer will take mud from the bottom of the last solids removal compartment and discharge mud near the top of the first
11.1
Solids Control Manual compartment in the Addition-Suction section (high equalization). This keeps the fluid level high in the Solids Removal section to maintain sufficient suction head for the centrifugal pumps, prevents vortexing by the stirrers and provides sufficient mixing volume in barite-recovery operations. In emergencies, the swing-arm can be lowered to provide access to the full surface volume. High equalization between the Solids Removal and Addition-Suction sections also increases the ability to detect volume changes due to influx or losses to formation. Because the volume of the Solids Removal Section remains constant, any volume change is apparent as a liquid level change in the Addition-Suction section only. This increases the sensitivity to volume fluctuations since the change in fluid level will be more pronounced per unit volume. The minimum equivalent diameter of the equalizer for adequate flow between compartments can be estimated by the following calculation: Diameter, in. = (Qmax, gpm/15)1/2 Recommended equalization between specific compartments is summarized below: Location Sand Trap Exit Degasser Desander Desilter Centrifuge Solids Removal - Addition Addition-Blend Blend-Suction Equalization High High Low Low Low High (Adjustable) Low Low
Sand Trap
A sand trap is the settling compartment located downstream of the shale shakers. It should be the ONLY settling compartment and should not be used in closed-loop systems. Its main function is to remove large solids that might plug the downstream hydrocyclones. With the fine-screen capabilities of todays shale shakers, the sand trap mainly serves as a backup should the shakers be bypassed or operated with torn screens. The sand trap should be the first compartment the mud enters after passing through the shaker screens. Since it is a settling tank, it should not be stirred and the mud should exit the sand trap over a high weir.
11.2
Tank Design and Equipment Arrangements The sand trap floor should have a 45 slope to its outlet. A 20 to 30 bbl volume is sufficient. A quick opening solids dump valve that can be closed against the mud flow is recommended to reduce mud losses. The sand trap should be dumped only when nearly filled with solids, since whole mud is lost when the sand trap is dumped.
Slug Tank
A slug tank is a small compartment (10-50 bbls) isolated from the rest of the active system in the Addition/Suction section. Slug tanks provide the ability to mix small volumes of specialized fluids and materials. The mud pump suction is manifolded to provide access to the slug tank. The slug tank is routinely used to mix small slugs of material to be pumped directly downhole, such as high density pills for placement in the drill pipe prior to tripping. It is also commonly used for preparation of LCM pills, spotting fluid for differential sticking, and viscous sweeps. The mixing hopper must be manifolded to permit isolation of the slug tank for mixing these pills.
Equipment Arrangement
The solids removal equipment should be arranged to sequentially remove finer solids as the mud moves from the flowline to the suction pit. The purpose of this arrangement is to reduce the solids loading on the next piece of equipment. Each device must take mud from an upstream compartment and discharge into the next compartment downstream. This applies to both unweighted and weighted mud equipment arrangements. The amount and type of equipment required will depend upon the drilling conditions and economics specific to each well. Unless a detailed economic analysis is made, it is usually better to overestimate solids removal equipment requirements. Underequipping the rigs can frequenly result in low penetration rates, differential sticking, high material consumption and excessive dilution and disposal volumes. Proper routing of fluids through the solids removal system is essential to achieve maximum solids removal efficiency. Mistakes in fluid routing can drastically reduce separation performance by causing a large percentage of the circulation flow to be bypassed. These errors are most commonly associated with mud cleaners and hydrocyclones. In addition to suction and discharge routing, overflow discharges to mud ditches and mud gun use are other common sources of routing errors. Ideally, each piece of solids control equipment should be fed by a single-purpose pump with no routing option. Mud cleaners, desilters and desanders should not, under any condition, require multiple suction locations. In practice, complex routing with multiple suction options is the rule rather than the exception. When this is the case, the internal configuration of the mud tanks during rig up must be inspected to trace all lines. Do not rely on as built schematics; they are usually
11.3
Solids Control Manual incorrect. Color-coding of the correct routing schematic to correspond with color-coded valves on the manifolds can greatly assist rig crew members in making correct routing decisions. Hard-plumbed routing errors should be corrected as soon as possible.
11.4
Tank Design and Equipment Arrangements
General Guidelines for Surface System Arrangements

The following guidelines are common to all equipment arrangements. 1. All removal compartments except the sand trap should be well-agitated to ensure even solids loading. 2. Mechanical stirrers are recommended. Check that they are properly-sized and installed correctly. 3. Mud guns are not recommended for the Solids Removal section. 4. When installed, the degasser should be located immediately downstream of the shale shaker and upstream of any equipment fed from a centrifugal pump. 5. Use a high equalizer between degasser suction and discharge. 6. All solids removal equipment should discharge immediately downstream of their suction compartments. 7. All equipment except the centrifuge should process at least 100% of the circulation flow. Backflow should be observed in these compartments. 8. Low equalization between suction and discharge for all solids removal equipment. 9. Different solids control devices must not share suction compartments or share discharge compartments unless they are making the same cut. For example, two desilters may share the same fluid routing, but a desander and desilter should not. 10. Adjustable equalizer between Solids Removal section and Addition-Suction section. This equalizer should normally be high except when access to the additional volume in the solids removal section is desired. 11. No solids removal equipment should discharge into the suction pit.
11.5
Equipment Arrangements
Unweighted Mud - Centrifuge Processing Active System

This arrangement may be used with unweighted muds having low formulation costs, where liquid disposal costs are negligible. Some whole mud is discarded with the hydrocyclone underflows. Typically used with environmentally benign water-based muds. A mud cleaner should be used only if there are insufficient desilter cones to process the entire circulation rate; it should be run in parallel with the desilter. Blank off the screen and discharge underflow. Use of a centrifuge will depend on the economics of the specific application. Median Separation
< 147 m na 70 m 25 m 25 m 4 m
Equipment
Shale Shakers
Comments
Capable of running 100 mesh (d50=147 microns) at maximum circulation rate. If required. Processing Rate = 110% of maximum circulating rate. Discard Underflow. Use as a desilter if required to achieve 110% of circulation rate. Run in parallel with other desilter manifolds. Total Processing Rate (including mud cleaner cones) = 110% of maximum circulating rate. Discard Underflow. Process at least 25% of maximum circulating rate. High G, high capacity machine. Discard Cake (Solids).
11.6
Degasser Desander
Mud Cleaner
Desilter
Centrifuge
11.7
Figure 10.8
Unweighted Mud - Centrifuge Processing Active System
Unweighted Mud - Centrifuge Processing Hydrocyclone Underflow

Used to reduce liquid discharged with cuttings while maintaining high separation efficiency. This arrangement is preferred when the liquid phase is expensive or when free liquid discharge must be limited. Hydrocyclones concentrate solids to centrifuge. Use caution when processing abrasive desander underflow; it may cause premature centrifuge wear. Centrifuge should process in excess of hydrocyclone underflow rate, with makeup mud from the active system. Refer to the centrifuge chapter for details of feed compartment design and routing. Median Separation
< 147 m na 70 m 25 m 4 m
Equipment
Shale Shakers Degasser Desander
Comments
Capable of running 100 mesh (d50=147 microns) at maximum circulation rate. If required. Processing Rate = 110% of maximum circulating rate. Underflow to Centrifuge. Processing Rate = 110% of maximum circulating rate. Underflow to Centrifuge. Processing Rate > Hydrocyclone underflow rate. High G, high capacity machine. Feed from hydrocyclone underflows, plus active system. Cake (wet solids) are discarded.
11.8
Desilter
Centrifuge
11.9
11.10
Figure 10.9
Unweighted Mud - Centrifuge Processing Hydrocyclone Underflow
Unweighted Mud - Centrifuge Processing Mud Cleaner Underflow

Recommended when large sections of sand are expected and free liquid must be recovered from desander underflow. The mudcleaner screen receives desander underflow. Sand is removed by the mud cleaner screen. Screen unders are processed by the centrifuge. Best alternative is to provide enough shale shakers to screen down to desander separation efficiency (74 microns) or use full size shaker to process cone unders. Median Separation
147
Equipment
Shale Shakers Degasser Desander
Comments
Capable of running 100 mesh (d50=147 microns) at maximum circulation rate. If required. Processing Rate = 110% of maximum circulating rate. Underflow to mud cleaner screen. Total processing rate should exceed maximum circulating rate. Both desander and mud cleaner cone underflows screened before processing by centrifuge. Processing Rate > Hydrocyclone underflow rate. High G, high capacity machine. Feed from hydrocyclone underflows, plus active system. Discard Cake (wet solids) are discarded.
na 70 m 25 m
11.11
Mud Cleaner
Centrifuge
4 m
11.12
11.13
Figure 10.10 Unweighted Mud - Centrifuge Processing Mud Cleaner Underflow
Weighted Water-Based Mud - Single-Stage Centrifuging (Barite Recovery)

This is the standard equipment arrangement for weighted water-based muds when fluid costs are low and liquid discharge is permitted. The mud cleaner may be used when the shakers cannot screen down to 200 mesh, but monitor barite losses. The centrifuge removes liquid and colloidal solids while recovering barite. Low centrifuge feed rates at high g-force and continuous processing are recommended to maximize barite recovery. Median Separation
> 74 m
Equipment
Shale Shakers
Comments
Capable of screening to 200 mesh at maximum circulation rate. Monitor solids discharge for barite content. If required. Run only if insufficient shaker capacity. 150 mesh screens recommended. Monitor screen discharge for barite content. Process 10-15% of circulation rate. Return solids to well-agitated compartment, upstream of addition section. Dilute feed. Discard centrate.
Degasser Mud Cleaner
na 74-100 m
11.14
Centrifuge
4 m
Note: Refer to the Dewatering chapter for addition of chemically-enhanced dewatering unit to this system.
11.15
11.16
Figure 10.11 Weighted Water-Based Mud - Single-Stage Centrifuging (Barite Recovery)
Weighted Mud - Two-Stage Centrifuging

This arrangement is used when liquid discharge must be minimized. The first centrifuge operates as a barite recovery unit. The second centrifuge, operating at maximum g-force, processes the centrate (overflow) from the barite recovery centrifuge. The solids are discharged and the centrate is returned to the active system. Colloidal solids are not removed. Median Separation
> 74 m
Equipment
Shale Shakers
Comments
Screen with finest mesh possible, down to 200 mesh (d50=74 microns) at maximum circulation rate. Monitor solids discharge for barite content. If required. Run only if insufficient shaker capacity. 150 mesh screens recommended. Monitor solids discharge for barite content. Barite recovery mode, high capacity machine. Return barite to well-agitated compartment upstream of addition section. Dilute feed. Run at highest G-force conditions will allow. Centrate to centrifuge #2.
Degasser Mud Cleaner
na 74-100 m
11.17
Centrifuge #1 Centrifuge #2 4 m
Run at maximum rpm, high-G machine. Discard solids. Return centrate to active system.
11.18
11.19
Figure 10.12 Weighted Mud - Two Stage Centrifuging
Complete System Layout For Both Weighted and Unweighted Mud

In many cases, multiple suction and discharge locations cannot be avoided. For example, centrifuges that will process both unweighted and weighted systems must be located to permit routing both the cake and centrate streams to either the active system or to discharge. The following schematics show the fluid routing requirements for a solids removal system which must process either unweighted or weighted mud. Note: The centrifuge to be used for barite recovery must be positioned so the solids may be routed either to discharge (unweighted) or returned to the active system (weighted mud). Use a high capacity machine for treating out coarse desilter underflows or recovering barite. The second unit should be a high-G machine capable of removing fine solids. If only one machine is used, it should be a high-G unit.
11.20
11.21
11.22
Figure 10.13 Generic - Complete System
Summary

The mud pits must contain enough usable mud to maintain mud properties and to fill the hole during a wet trip at maximum depth. The active circulating system is divided into two sections: Solids Removal and Addition-Suction. The purpose of each is self-explanatory. Each section is further divided into enough compartments to carry out its designed function. Additional tankage includes the slug tank for mixing and pumping small pills, the trip tank for accurately metering pipe displacement during trips, and the premix tank discussed in Chapter 10, Addition/Mixing Systems. The best compartment shape is round with a conical bottom, followed by square with a V-bottom. Each must have enough surface area to allow entrained air to break out. Equalization height between compartments will depend upon the duty of the compartment. Refer to the discussion in this chapter for specific recommendations. The sand trap, located under the shale shakers, is the only settling compartment and should not be used in closed loop systems. Equipment arrangements for a variety of unweighted and weighted muds are illustrated in this chapter. Also included is a complete system arrangement when both unweighted and weighted muds must be processed during the course of the well.
11.23
11.24
Chapter 12. Dewatering Systems
The use of on-line closed loop circulating systems to achieve drilling waste minimization is gaining popularity both in the domestic U.S. market and in other areas around the world. The recent introduction of dewatering devices to further close the loop of drilling fluid circulating systems and to dewater reserve pits is derived from technology used in the industrial and sanitary waste treatment industries. The optimization of solids control equipment has been of primary concern to the drilling industry for many years. However, the emphasis in the past has been to utilize the solids control equipment to help optimize mud properties in order to control such variables as solids content, solids distribution, rheology, and fluid loss control. These properties affect important drilling parameters such as rate of penetration, stuck pipe, borehole stability, formation damage, and drilling costs. Because these objectives did not include entirely closing the circulating loop, significant volumes of liquid drilling wastes were generated. The recent advent of more stringent environmental regulations and the better understanding of the economics of running a 100% efficient closed loop system has resulted in the introduction of dewatering technology to the drilling industry. The term closed loop has been used quite freely in the drilling industry to describe various solids control layouts and drilling practices. In the context of this discussion, a closed loop system is one where all excess mud from either dilution or effluent from conventional solids control equipment is further processed using chemically-enhanced separation technology. This results in all solids being removed from the waste drilling mud while the liquid portion is recycled back to the active system. Ideally, all other liquid wastes generated on location are processed and also recycled. Using this technology often eliminates the need for a reserve pit. There are numerous applications for a closed loop dewatering system. Reasons may include restrictive environmental regulations, small locations where reserve pit space is limited, or locations where water is in short supply. The options are limited for an operator faced with a zero discharge or reduced discharge scenario. A simple solution still widely used today is to haul off all cuttings and waste fluids to an offsite disposal facility. This can be expensive and there could be costs involving future liability if the disposal site is later declared a hazardous area. In certain areas the cuttings and waste fluids can be spread on nearby land. This can be a cheaper option but availability, meeting environmental specifications, and long-term liability can be a problem. Pumping waste fluid back down into the formation is sometimes used, but possible contamination of groundwater worries some regulators. Whatever method is used to dispose of drilling
12.1
Proprietary: - for the exclusive use of Chevron Corporatiom and other wholly owned subsidiaries of Chevron Corporation.
Solids Control Manual wastes, using good waste management techniques will usually result in substantial cost reductions. Savings of up to 50% have been realized on disposal and reclamation costs as well as reduced drilling days by operators using sound waste management practices. The use of chemically enhanced dewatering devices is proving to be a reliable method of reducing wastes generated at the rig site. Several dewatering devices have been investigated as possible candidates for oilfield application, including a belt press, horizontal belt/vacuum filter, a vertical screwpress, and decanting bowl centrifuges.
Economic Overview
Dewatering flocculation units are practical devices for the control of solids and liquids. They are not, however, cost effective in all situations. Since they are often used as an alternative to disposing of liquid mud, operating the unit in this mode would have to be less expensive than the disposal costs. If an inexpensive mud is to be discarded as waste on location (with no associated treatment costs), it is unlikely the dewatering unit would be beneficial. However, if the liquid phase is expensive, or the mud has to be disposed of at a commercial waste disposal site, then the use of the dewatering equipment should be investigated further to prove its feasibility. Some of the costs that should be considered when determining whether or not the dewatering unit will be cost effective are as follows:
Disposal Costs: The proper use of the dewatering unit can negate the necessity to dispose of liquid mud until the well is completed. Solids will have to be disposed of in a manner according to local or national government regulations. If the estimated disposal costs without a dewatering unit are higher than the costs associated with the dewatering unit, then the dewatering unit is definitely cost effective. Centrate Cost: If the centrate (filtrate) of the liquid water base mud is expensive to formulate (i.e., saturated brine, glycol, etc.), then recovering the liquid could be extremely beneficial and cost effective. Solids Control Equipment: The efficiency of the overall solids removal equipment will increase considerably with the use of a dewatering system. The dewatering unit will remove almost all of the insoluble solids and very little of the dissolved solids. Other than makeup volume, usually no additional dilution (that would otherwise be needed without the use of the dewatering system), will be required unless lost circulation occurs. Location Costs: The use of the dewatering unit will allow smaller reserve pits to be built, thereby decreasing overall location costs. Since no liquid will be
12.2
Dewatering Systems discarded, reserve pits can be constructed to accommodate only solid material. Often reserve pits can be eliminated completely if solids can be immediately spread on the land or taken off site for disposal. To determine the cost effectiveness of using a dewatering closed loop system, follow this logical order when calculating the economics: First, look at the costs that would be incurred if a dewatering unit was not used: 1. Choose the solids control equipment that will be needed and determine the costs that will be incurred. Estimate the overall efficiency of this equipment as this will be needed to determine how much of the drilled solids will be removed. 2. Calculate the total solids per interval that will be generated (including washouts) as a result of the hole drilled. Determine the amount of solids that will be removed with the solids control equipment and the cost of disposing of these solids. Disposal rates at commercial facilities usually do not vary significantly between the mud and cuttings. Transportation rates, however, will differ considerably if road transportation is used. Keep in mind that the solids generated will not be dry, but rather will contain a significant amount of liquid. The amount of liquid will usually depend on the size and type of solids generated and can be determined through analysis. For estimation purposes, a reasonable solids-to-liquid ratio is 1:1 or 50% liquid by volume. 3. Calculate the dilution volumes that will be required to maintain the desired drilled solids content. The efficiency of the solids control equipment selected will play a crucial part in determining this number. Since this volume will have to be disposed of before dilution can be added, use this volume to determine the liquid disposal costs. Disposal rates will usually range from $5.00 to $10.00 per barrel (plus transportation) depending on the type of mud being discarded. Next, look at the costs of the dewatering, closed loop system: 4. Dewatering system costs include the equipment, personnel, and the chemicals used in the flocculation process. Equipment and personnel costs are relatively fixed, but chemical usage will vary and will be the most difficult to quantify. The chemical costs will depend on the product cost and the concentrations required to achieve the correct flocculated state. Flocculent concentration increases significantly as the solids content of the feed fluid increases, particularly when the measured solids is above 5% by volume. Figure 12.1 graphically illustrates this point as the amount of flocculent needed increased from 325 ppm at 4.85% solids to almost 600 ppm at 5.1% solids to 750 ppm at 5.5% solids. This demonstrates the need for good solids removal ability upstream of the dewatering unit.
12.3
Figure 12.1
Flocculent Concentration, PPM
Effect of Solids on Flocculent Concentration. Flocculent consumption can increase dramatically as solids concentrations increase.
Different mud systems will also require different flocculating polymer concentrations. Dispersed muds need more flocculent to achieve desired results than do nondispersed. Optimum concentrations of the flocculent are needed to provide the best floc for the lowest price. Since any excess flocculent used will be returned to the mud system, keeping this concentration to a minimum is important. Elevated chemical costs can make the overall dewatering system cost prohibitive. 5. Solids disposal costs will be slightly higher when using a closed loop dewatering system as more solids are removed from the mud. It is assumed that the dewatering unit will be able to remove all the solids necessary to maintain the drilled solids content at desired levels. This assumption is based on the fact that enough solids removal equipment is utilized to help the dewatering unit achieve this goal. If these solids are to be spread on location, add the costs of the spreading. If the solids are to be disposed of at a commercial facility, add the costs of disposal, plus transportation. Assume all liquids not associated with the solids can be recycled back to the mud system or dewatering unit. 6. Recovering a costly centrate can be a definite economic saving. If the mud in use is a basic inexpensive fresh water system and if fresh water is readily available, the liquid phase cost will be minimal. However, if the centrate contains salts, glycols, or expensive polymers, recycling this liquid must be included in the economics and may be a significant factor in deciding whether or not to use a closed loop system with a dewatering unit. Figure 12.2 clearly
12.4
Dewatering Systems shows that the amount of material returned in some centrates can be significant. As shown, a considerable amount of polymer, fluid loss control agents, and soluble salts return to the active system in the centrate. As expected, barite, bentonite and low gravity solids are almost totally removed and discarded as waste. Figure 12.3 shows an example of the cost of the chemicals salvaged by the dewatering unit versus the cost of the mud in use. As can be seen, a substantial portion of the mud makeup cost can be returned.
Figure 12.2
Evaluation of Dewatering Centrate. The amount of valuable material returned in the centrate can be significant.
7. Subtract the portion of the location costs that would not otherwise be incurred if the closed loop system were not applied. This will normally include the preparation of the reserve pit system, larger location, location clean-up and backfill of pits. After all calculations are completed, compare the costs of having a dewatering system versus not having one, and decide if a dewatering closed system is economically warranted. These figures may be crude at first, but with more precise data and increased experience, the values will become more accurate. If the cost per barrel of dewatering is less than the cost per barrel of disposal, it is obviously economical to proceed in this direction.
12.5
Figure 12.3
Material Returned in Centrate. The value of the centrate must be considered when estimating dewatering economics.
Monitoring Dewatering Costs and Efficiency

If it is decided that a dewatering system is warranted, monitoring the cost efficiency on a daily basis is imperative. To approach this, equate all costs associated with the dewatering unit to a dollar ($) per barrel of mud processed figure. By equating all costs to $/barrel, comparisons against disposal costs can easily be made. Figure 12.4 is a sample form that can be used to keep track of these expenses as well as the mud volumes processed. The contributing factors in determining overall cost efficiency are: a) dewatering equipment, personnel and chemical costs, and b) volume of liquid processed. The centrate returned may contribute to the cost savings as well and should be determined by multiplying the centrate value times the volume returned. As hole size and process volumes decrease, the cost of dewatering ($/bbl) increases. At some stage it may become evident that the dewatering cost will be greater than disposal costs. Figure 12.5 shows the interval cost per barrel of a dewatering operation that lasts through five intervals. Note that the cost usually increases with each subsequent interval. Hole sizes are smaller and therefore circulating volumes are less. At the point where the cost per barrel approaches the cost of disposal, a decision will have to be made to either remove the dewatering equipment, or treat the mud on a batch basis. In this example, that point is reached at the end of interval #3. Continual processing of mud in interval #4 is
12.6
Dewatering Systems
Figure 12.4
Form for Calculating Dewatering Efficiency
more costly than disposing of the liquid volume. Two options are available: (1) Cease dewatering operations, or (2) place the unit on standby until a sufficient volume is accumulated to warrant the operating cost to dewater. As stated before, the $/bbl efficiency of dewatering can be decreased either by lowering the costs ($), or increasing the processed volume (bbl). The economics of maintaining the unit on standby will depend on the standby rate and anticipated frequency of use.
12.7
Figure 12.5
Dewatering Costs, by Interval. Intervals 4 and 5 are uneconomic to dewater in this example since the liquid disposal cost is less.
Equipment Selection
Dewatering Devices
A typical dewatering system consists of a polymer hydration and storage section, mixing and injection manifold, injection and transfer pumps and a centrifuge for separation of liquid and solids (Figure 12.6). These systems, when operated correctly have the capability of taking a stream of mud from the active system or storage and separating all of the solids from the liquid. Depending on the mud type and the solids distribution in the feed (influent), the liquid content will average 30 to 50% by volume after separation. With this ability for separation, the dewatering device makes a very efficient piece of solids control equipment. If the volume capability of the unit is adequate, no dilution in excess of circulating maintenance will be required. Since no free liquid is discharged, the loop is considered to be closed.
12.8
Dewatering Systems
Figure 12.6
Dewatering System Equipment. This schematic shows a typical dewatering configuration for a weighted mud.
On the unweighted sections of the hole, the dewatering unit should be operating on the active system, processing mud after it has passed the other solids control equipment. If a high volume centrifuge is being used for solids removal on the unweighted section, it may be advisable to process the effluent of this unit. This will lower the solids load to the dewatering unit and decrease polymer consumption. If the centrifuge is not capable of generating enough effluent to keep up with the solids removal required, then treating some of the active system should be done. Note also that in some cases, flocculation may become more difficult when processing only centrifuge effluent in unweighted mud. Laboratory tests conducted at APR showed that the presence of some larger solids will aid the flocculation process. Therefore, the addition of some whole mud to the centrifuge effluent is likely beneficial to the dewatering process.
12.9
Solids Control Manual On weighted systems where a barite recovery centrifuge is in operation, the dewatering unit should process the effluent of this unit. Because of this type of equipment arrangement, no hesitation is necessary in operating the centrifuge for adjustment of the mud properties. The effluent that is normally a disposal problem can now be treated and returned to the active system.
Waste Management
The operator is responsible for all wastes generated on the drilling location. Although drilling wastes are not generally regarded as hazardous, the disposal method must be in compliance with applicable regulations. These regulations and economic considerations will ultimately dictate how the drilling waste streams must be handled. Efficient solids control and chemically-enhanced dewatering systems can greatly reduce the volume of liquid drilling waste, but they are only a part of a comprehensive drilling waste management plan. The optimum approach is one that first reduces the quantity of waste, assures the waste is nonhazardous, and then selects the least expensive, acceptable disposal method. An effective drilling waste management plan recognizes that local environmental regulations and individual well drilling conditions will affect the design, implementation and economics of the solids control and waste handling system. There is no single system design that can be recommended for all cases. However, the following approach can help implement a solids control and waste handling system which is economically and environmentally sound: 1. Know the regulations applicable to the area. Select a safe and economic waste disposal process and drilling fluid that is compatible with these regulations. The potential long-term liability of the waste disposal options must also be considered, especially when waste will be hauled off to a central commercial disposal facility. 2. Identify and isolate all potential waste sources both on the location and in the surrounding environment. This can include location or deck drainage, effluent from sewage processing, drilling fluids, drilled cuttings, cement returns and fluids produced from well tests. 3. Check the drilling plan to be sure that all elements of the solids control plan are compatible throughout the entire drilling stage. 4. Design the location layout, grading plan and reserve pits to support the solids control and waste handling plan. Allow for the proper segregation of waste streams to avoid contamination.
12.10
Dewatering Systems 5. Evaluate the drilling contractors existing solids control equipment and mud pits. Modify and/or add to the contractors solids removal system as necessary to achieve the most efficient and cost effective system. 6. Select drilling fluids and additives that are compatible with the waste disposal method and the drilling requirements. 7. Coordinate your solids and fluid disposal plans with regulatory authorities. Be sure advance approval is obtained to handle all disposal as it occurs during the drilling of the well. During the implementation phase, the following steps can help ensure that the operation proceeds according to the plan: 8. Inspect the solids equipment piping and fluid routing well before spud to provide enough time to make corrections. 9. Educate the rig personnel. The best solids control equipment is of little value if it is not run correctly. Use a team approach. Make sure the rig personnel completely understand the system and its purpose. Stress any limitations on discharge. 10. Monitor solids removal efficiency. Measure the amount of water added to the system with a water meter. Analyze the solids contents of the solids control equipment discharge streams. Monitor the efficiency of the dewatering unit. Maintain performance data records on individual solids removal equipment and the entire system. 11. Follow up on disposal logistics. Plan ahead for regulatory permitting requirements. 12. Reinspect the solids control system arrangements between drilling intervals to be sure that the required changes are made in fluid routing and equipment operation. Conduct additional rig personnel training.
12.11
Summary
Chemically-enhanced dewatering units are increasing in popularity due to more stringent environmental regulations and the incentive of reduced potential, long-term liability associated with drilling wastes. Use has also increased because of a better understanding of the economic benefits attributable to improved solids removal efficiency. Alternatives to dewatering include hauling the waste to a central disposal facility, land spreading, or injecting the liquid and/or solid waste downhole into a suitable formation. In this context, the term closed-loop is defined as one where all excess mud from either dilution or solids control equipment effluent is further processed using chemically-enhanced dewatering technology to minimize liquid waste volumes. Applications include locations with environmental restrictions, small locations where reserve pit space is limited, or where water is in short supply. The economics of dewatering will depend upon the cost of disposal, liquid centrate value, solids control equipment efficiency, and location costs. A procedure is outlined in this chapter to determine the cost effectiveness of dewatering. Monitoring the cost efficiency of dewatering on a daily basis is imperative. All costs associated with the dewatering unit should be converted to dollar ($) per barrel of mud processed figure. A sample form for tracking dewatering efficiency is provided. A typical dewatering system consists of a polymer hydration and storage section, mixing and injection manifold, injection and transfer pumps, and a centrifuge for separation of liquid and solids. The liquid content of the centrifuge cake will average 40 to 50%. On unweighted muds, the dewatering unit should be rigged up to process both the centrifuge centrate with additional makeup as required from the active system. Laboratory tests indicate that the presence of some larger solids will aid the flocculation process. On weighted systems, the dewatering unit should process the effluent of barite-recovery centrifuge. In both cases, the recovered liquid can be treated and returned to the active system. Successful drilling waste management requires thorough planning. No single system design is optimum in all instances. An approach is provided to help implement a solids control and waste handling system that is both economically and environmentally sound. These guidelines do not detail specific waste handling or remediation procedures, but provide a checklist of issues that must be considered when planning and operating the system.
12.12
Chapter 2. Economics
The impact of good solids control can be very significant and can lead to substantial cost savings, but often there is reluctance to invest in solids control for the following reasons: 1. Many of the benefits are indirect and the savings are hard to quantify. 2. Methods to economically justify solids control equipment were not available. 3. Techniques to measure performance are limited. 4. Disappointing results from ill-chosen or incorrectly-operated equipment. Although the benefits from good solids control are numerous, the cost savings are not apparent in normal drilling cost accounting. For example, the savings due to reduced trouble costs and improved penetration rate, although substantial benefits, cannot be accurately calculated. Usually the drilling fluid gets most of the credit (or blame) since mud material consumption is easily tracked and the mud properties are the only direct indication of solids control system performance. In a realistic sense, the mud and the solids control equipment are integral parts of one system. One cannot plan the mud without considering the solids control system and vice versa. This does not mean that the benefits of good solids control practices cannot be measured.
Economic Justification
Penetration Rate
The impact of solids control on penetration rate is best depicted by Figure 2.1. This has become somewhat of a classic illustration of the benefits of a low solids content mud. For example, a reduction in average solids content from 4.8% (9.0 ppg) to 2.6% (8.7 ppg) results in a 15% reduction in total rig days. Given a 10,000 ft well costing $700,000 excluding mud cost, the estimated savings could reach $100,000. If even half of these savings were realized, it would more than pay for the best solids removal system available. In soft rock country such as the Gulf Coast, efficient solids removal can reduce the need to control-drill by limiting required dilution rates to manageable levels and reducing operational problems due to overloaded solids removal equipment. The benefits from efficient solids removal, e.g., low-silt muds, have been docu-
2.1
Solids Control Manual mented for Gulf Coast drilling since the mid-60s when hydrocyclone use was first advocated.
Figure 2.1
Effect of Solids Content on Drilling Performance. The benefits of low solids contents are most apparent at less than 5% solids.
Dilution Rate
Solids removal efficiency directly impacts dilution costs. When dilution water is added to the system, three costs are incurred simultaneously: 1. Dilution water cost. 2. Cost of additives to maintain stable mud properties. 3. Disposal cost. The savings due to improved penetration rates and reduced trouble time, while real, cannot be reliably predicted as justification for improved solids control equipment. In many cases however, the economic advantages due to reduced dilution and disposal costs are more than enough to justify expenditures for additional equipment. The economic benefits in terms of mud consumption and disposal can be determined through a simple mass balance analysis: Removing a given percentage of drilled solids will result in a certain dilution volume to maintain the
2.2
Proprietary: - for the exclusive use of Chevron Corporation and other wholly owned subsidiaries of Chevron Corporation .
Economics desired maximum concentration of drilled solids in the mud. The relevant parameters and their symbols used in the calculations are listed below. Solids Control Economic Analysis Parameters
Vc Vi Vf Vd Vlw Vsw Vt ki ks X Y D L W = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Volume of drilled solids generated, bbls Initial volume in tanks, previous hole/casing, bbls Final volume in tanks, previous hole/casing, bbls Volume of addition/dilution fluid required, bbls Volume of liquid waste to be disposed, bbls Volume of wet solids to be disposed, bbls Total volume of solids and liquids to be disposed, bbls Initial concentration of drilled solids, vol. fraction Maximum volume fraction of drilled solids, vol. fraction Drilled solids removed by equipment, vol. fraction Liquid associated with the cuttings, bbl/bbl Hole diameter, in. Section length, ft Washout, vol. fraction Density of dilution fluid, ppg Density of drilled cuttings, ppg Mud weight at the start of the section, ppg Desired mud weight, end of section, ppg
d c i e
Economic Analysis Calculations

First, the volume of cuttings generated in a given interval must be calculated: V c = 0.000971 D L W For a given percent of drilled solids removed, X, the required dilution volume is computed by: ( 1 ks ) ki V d = ------------------- ( 1 X )V c V i + ----- V i ks ks
2
2.3
Solids Control Manual The following equations may be used to calculate the solids removal efficiency, Xc, and the associated dilution volume required to discharge only wet solids: Vc ks ( Vf + Vc ) + k iV X c = ----------------------------------------------------------i V c ( 1 + ks Y ) Vd = ( Vf Vi ) + Xc VC ( 1 + Y ) The required mud weight (density) of the dilution volume, Vd, is based on the specified starting and ending densities and is calculated by: Vi Vc d = e + ------ ( e i ) ------ ( 1 X ) ( c e ) Vd Vd The total volume of solids and liquid generated in an interval is given by: Vt = V i + V c + Vd The wet solids volume, Vsw, and liquid volume, Vlw, discharged while drilling the interval is computed by: V s w = XV c ( 1 + Y ) V lw = V t ( V f + V c + V sw ) The remaining circulating volume includes the volume of solids not removed by the solids removal equipment. Since the solids are assumed to be too fine to be removed by the solids control equipment, their volume is counted as liquid volume for disposal purposes. When the entire circulating system is to be discharged at the end of the interval, the total liquid for disposal is calculated by: V lw = V t V sw Once the waste volumes are calculated, the total dilution and disposal cost for the interval may be determined by estimating the equipment rental cost and the cost/bbl for addition/dilution and liquid/solids disposal: 1. Solids Control Equipment Cost
Estimate rental, transport, service, and maintenance (e.g., screens) cost for the interval.
2.4
Economics 2. Addition/Dilution Cost
Estimate the cost/bbl by including purchase cost for dilution liquid, trucking, and additive cost.
3. Liquid/Solids Disposal Cost
Estimate the cost/bbl by including hauling, disposal, treatment, reserve pit construction and reclamation.
Example Calculations Interval Data:

Vc Vi Vf Vd Vlw Vsw Vt ki ks X Y D L W = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Volume of drilled solids generated, bbls 360 bbls 360 bbls Volume of addition/dilution fluid required, bbls Volume of liquid waste to be disposed, bbls Volume of wet solids to be disposed, bbls Total volume of solids and liquids to be disposed, bbls 0 (fresh mud, no drilled solids) 0.06 (6% maximum drilled solids) 0, 0.1, 0.5 (3 cases) 1.0 (1:1 solids to liquid ratio in wet solids discharge) 12.25 in. 1600 ft 1.10 (10% washout) Density of dilution/addition fluid, ppg 2.6 x 8.34 = 21.68 ppg 8.6 ppg initial mud weight 9.4 ppg final mud weight
d c i e
Dilution Cost: $5.00/bbl Liquid Waste Cost: $3.00/bbl Solid Waste Cost: $5.60/bbl
2.5
Solids Control Manual Calculations: 1. Cuttings volume: V C = 0.000971 D L W V c = 0.000971 ( 12.25 ) ( 1600 ) ( 1.1 ) = 256 bbls 2. Dilution volumes for each solids removal efficiency: ( 1 ks ) ki V d = ------------------- ( 1 X )V c V i + ----- V i ks ks For X = 0.0
0 ( 1 0.06 ) V d = ------------------------ ( 1 0 ) 256 360 + ---------- ( 360 ) = 3650 bbls 0.06 0.06
2 2
For X = 0.1
0 ( 1 0.06 ) V d = ----------------------- ( 1 0.1 ) 256 360 + ---------- ( 360 ) = 3250 bbls 0.06 0.06
For X = 0.5
0 ( 1 0.06 ) V d = ----------------------- ( 1 0.5 ) 256 360 + ---------- ( 360 ) = 1645 bbls 0.06 0.06
3. Dilution density: In this example, the required density will not change with each case. The parameters for X=1 are chosen for illustration purposes. Vi Vc d = e + ------ ( e i ) ------ ( 1 X ) ( c e ) V V
d d
360 256 d = 9.4 + -------- ( 9.4 8.6 ) ----------- ( 1 0.1 ) ( 21.7 9.4 ) = 8.6 ppg 360 3250
2.6
Economics 4. Solids removal efficiency and dilution volume to achieve zero whole-mud discharge while drilling: V c ks ( V f + V c ) + k i V X c = ----------------------------------------------------------i Vc ( 1 + ks Y )
256 0.06 ( 360 + 256 ) + 0 ( 360 ) X c = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ = 0.81 256 ( 1 + 0.06 1.0 )
V d = ( Vf V i ) + X c Vc ( 1 + Y ) V d = ( 360 360 ) + 0.81 ( 256 ) ( 1 + 1 ) = 415 bbls 5. Summary of waste disposal volumes: Total Volume bbls
X = 0.00 X = 0.10 X = 0.50 X = 0.81 4266 3866 2261 1030
Wet Solids Liquid While Drilling Total Liquid bbls bbls bbls
0 51 256 414 3650 3199 1389 0 4266 3815 2005 616
6. Cost estimate for each case, discarding total liquid volume (last column in Step 5): Equipment Costs
$0 $100 $500 $5000
Drilled Solids Removed

0% 10% 50% 81%
Addition/Dilution Costs
$18,250 $16,250 $8225 $2075
Disposal Costs Solids Liquids

$0 $286 $1434 $2318 $12,678 $11,445 $6015 $1848
Total Costs
$30,928 $28,081 $16,174 $11,241
The example illustrates how an increase in equipment costs to improve solids removal efficiency is justified by the savings in addition/dilution and disposal costs, even without considering savings attributable to higher penetration rates or reduced trouble costs.
2.7
Solids Control Economics and Performance Program (SECOP)

A natural question arising from the economic analysis exercise is "What equipment will I need to achieve the optimum solids removal efficiency?" It is also apparent that the determination of an economically-optimum solids control system can be a time consuming, iterative process. The equipment costs to achieve the minimum required dilution volume (commonly called a "closed-loop" mud system) may not be economic in all cases. It may not even be physically possible with available mechanical solids removal technology. The Solids Control Economic and Performance Analysis Program (SECOP) was developed at APR to assist drilling personnel in the optimum selection of solids control equipment. It is available as an Integrated Drilling Assistance Program for use on the PC. The diskette provided with this manual contains an earlier, interactive version of the program. This program analyzes: 1. The economics of solids control in terms of potential savings in mud dilution and disposal costs versus the percent drill solids removed.
2. The performance of solids control equipment. removed by each piece of equipment selected.
It predicts the drill solids
3. The loss of weighting material and mud from each piece of equipment for weighted muds and the predicted recovery from barite-recovery centrifuging.
4. The performance for different equipment options to determine the most effective solids control system for drilling a well. SECOP predicts only the savings in mud and disposal costs. As discussed previously, no model exists to predict additional savings from higher penetration rates and lower trouble costs that result from effective solids control. The program uses models developed as a result of extensive equipment testing at APR to predict individual equipment and total system performance. The overall economics calculations are based on the same equations described above. A complete description of the program is provided in the IDAP reference manual. The recommended application of SECOP is to match the performance history of the solids control system for an offset well. This can be done by selecting the proper lithology and resulting particle size distribution which matches the mud vol-
2.8
Economics umes and costs for the offset well. Once a lithology match has been made, different equipment options may be tried to find the most economically-effective solids control equipment for the proposed well. A successful economic analysis for future wells will depend on determining a representative particle size distribution from the offset well which, in turn, is dependent upon having accurate records of dilution volumes and equipment operation. This emphasizes the importance of accurately metering water additions and equipment performance while drilling. SECOP may then be used to monitor equipment performance and establish representative particle size distributions for future economic analysis and equipment selection.
Monitoring System Performance

The API Recommended Practice 13C contains a field method for evaluating the total efficiency of the drilling fluid processing system in water-based fluids. As with any performance analysis, this procedure depends upon accurate dilution volume information. The API procedure uses the dilution volume over a given interval to compute a dilution factor, DF, which is the volume ratio of actual mud built to mud dilution required to maintain a desired solids concentration with no solids removal equipment. The dilution factor is used to determine the total solids removal efficiency of the system. This total efficiency can then be used in SECOP to establish a representative particle-size distribution for further analysis and equipment performance predictions.
API Procedure for Evaluating Total Efficiency of Solids Control Systems (Water-Based Muds)
1. Over a desired interval length, obtain accurate water additions and retort data. 2. From the retort data, calculate:
The average drilled solids concentration in the mud, ks. The average water fraction in the mud, kw.
3. Calculate the volume of mud built, Vm: Vw V m = ------kw 4. Calculate the volume of drilled solids, Vc: V c = 0.000971 D L W
2
2.9
Solids Control Manual 5. Calculate the dilution volume required if no solids were removed, Vd: Vc V d = -----ks 6. Calculate the dilution factor, DF: Vm DF = ------Vd 7. Calculate the total solids removal performance, Et: E t = ( 1 DF ) Multiply by 100 to calculate as a percentage.
The accuracy of the API procedure depends on a relatively constant solids concentration in the mud, constant surface circulating volume, and consistent averaging techniques over the interval of interest. Regardless, the total solids removal performance should be reported at frequent intervals to facilitate solids control analysis and planning for future wells. Example Calculation Interval Data:
Water Added, Vw Average Water Fraction, kw Interval Length, L Bit Diameter, D Washout, W Average Drilled Solids Concentration, ks 1481 bbl 0.9 1600 ft 12.25 in. 10% 0.06
Calculations: 1. Calculate the volume of mud built, Vm: Vw 1481 V m = ------- = ----------- = 1645 bbls kw 0.9 2. Calculate the volume of drilled solids, Vc: V c = 0.000971 D L W
= 0.000971 ( 12.25 ) ( 1600 ) ( 1.1 ) = 256 bbls
2 2
2.10
Economics 3. Calculate the dilution volume required if no solids were removed, Vd: Vc 256 V d = ------ = ---------- = 4267 bbls ks 0.06 4. Calculate the dilution factor, DF: Vm 1645 DF = ------- = ----------- = 0.386 Vd 4267 5. Calculate the total solids removal performance, Et: E t = ( 1 DF ) = 1 0.386 = 0.614 Expressed as a percentage: Et = 61.4%
2.11
Summary
The economic advantages of good solids control practices, while real, are usually difficult to predict in terms of improved penetration rates and reduced trouble time. However, savings in dilution and disposal costs can be predicted and are often ample justification to invest in improved solids control equipment. Solids removal efficiency directly impacts the cost of dilution, material consumption and waste disposal. A simple mass balance approach may be used to predict total dilution and waste volumes as a function of solids removal efficiency. Example calculations show how an investment in solids control equipment may be easily justified by the savings realized from reduced addition/dilution and disposal costs. The API Recommended Practice 13C contains a field method for monitoring system performance in the field. This method depends upon accurate dilution volume monitoring to determine total solids removal efficiency. The API procedure and example calculations are presented in this section.
2.12
Chapter 3. Shale Shakers
The shale shaker can be regarded as the first line of defense in the solids removal system. It has proven to be a simple and reliable method of removing large amounts of coarse, drilled cuttings from the circulating system. The shale shakers performance can be easily observed; all aspects of its operation are visible. Shale shakers provide the advantage of not degrading soft or friable cuttings. When well-operated and maintained, shale shakers can produce a relatively dry cuttings discharge. In unweighted muds, the shale shakers main role is to reduce the solids loading to the downstream hydrocyclones and centrifuges to improve their efficiency. In muds containing solid weighting agents such as barite, the shale shaker is the primary solids removal device. It is usually relied upon to remove all drilled cuttings coarser than the weighting material. Downstream equipment will often remove too much valuable weighting material. Enough shakers should be installed to process the entire circulating rate with the goal of removing as many drilled cuttings as economically feasible. Given the importance of the shale shaker, the most efficient shakers and screens should be selected to achieve optimum economic performance of the solids control system. Shaker performance is a function of:
Vibration pattern Vibration dynamics Deck size and configuration Shaker screen characteristics Mud rheology (plastic viscosity) Solids loading rate (penetration rate, hole diameter)
The impact of each is discussed in detail in this chapter. Guidelines for shaker and screen selection are also provided.
Principle of Operation
Simply stated, a shale shaker works by channeling mud and solids onto vibrating screens. The mud and fine solids pass through the screens and return to the active system. Solids coarser than the screen openings are conveyed off the screen by the vibratory motion of the shaker. The shaker is the only solids
3.1
Solids Control Manual removal device that makes a separation based on physical particle size. Hydrocyclones and centrifuges separate solids based on differences in their relative mass. The screens are vibrated by rotating eccentrically-weighted shafts attached to the basket. The major components of a typical shale shaker are illustrated in Figure 3.1.
Figure 3.1
Shale Shaker Components. These components are common to most shale shakers.
Vibration Patterns
Shale shakers are classified in part by the vibration pattern made by the shaker basket location over a vibration cycle (e.g., linear motion shakers). The pattern will depend on the placement and orientation of the vibrators. Four basic vibration patterns are possible: circular, unbalanced elliptical, linear, and balanced elliptical motion.
Circular Motion
As the name implies, the shaker basket moves in a uniform circular motion when viewed from the side (Figure 3.2). This is a balanced vibration pattern because all regions of the shaker basket move in phase with the identical pattern. In order to achieve balanced circular motion, a vibrator must be located on each side of the shaker basket at its center of gravity (CG) with the axis of rotation perpendicu-
3.2
Shale Shakers lar to the side of the basket. The Brandt Tandem is a common example of a circular motion shale shaker. Solids Conveyance and Fluid Throughput Circular motion shakers will not efficiently convey solids uphill. Therefore, most shakers of this type are designed with horizontal configurations. Fluid throughput is limited by the deck angle, but augmented slightly by the higher Gs normally used (see Vibration Dynamics section). The soft acceleration pattern does not tend to drive soft, sticky solids, such as gumbo, into the screens. Recommended Applications
gumbo, or soft, sticky solids conditions scalping shakers for coarse solids removal
Figure 3.2
Circular Motion. All areas of the basket rotate in a circular motion.
Unbalanced Elliptical Motion

The difference between circular motion and unbalanced elliptical motion is a matter of vibrator placement. To achieve unbalanced elliptical motion, the vibrators are typically located above the shaker basket. Because the vibrator counterweights no longer rotate about the shakers center of gravity, torque is applied on the shaker basket. This causes a rocking motion which generates different vibration patterns to occur along the length of the basket, hence the term unbalanced. Refer to Appendix E, Equipment Specifications, for a list of shakers having unbalanced elliptical motion. Figure 3.3 illustrates how the vibration pattern may change along the length of the basket. At the feed end of the shaker, an elliptical vibration pattern is created; the angle of vibration is pointed toward the discharge end. In this region, forward solids conveyance is good. However, at the discharge end of the shaker, angle of the elliptical pattern is pointed back towards the feed end. This will cause the solids to convey backwards unless the deck is pitched downhill at a sufficient angle to overcome the uphill acceleration imparted on the solids by the shaker motion.
3.3
Solids Control Manual Solids Conveyance and Fluid Throughput The downhill deck orientation restricts the unbalanced elliptical motion shakers ability to process fluid; mud losses can be a concern. However, the deck orientation is beneficial for removing sticky solids such as gumbo. Recommended Applications
gumbo, or soft, sticky solids conditions scalping shakers for coarse solids removal
Figure 3.3
Unbalanced Elliptical Motion. The vibration pattern changes along the length of the basket.
Linear Motion
Linear motion is achieved by using two counter-rotating vibrators which, because of their positioning and vibration dynamics, will naturally operate in phase. They are located so that a line drawn from the shakers center of gravity bisects at 90 a line drawn between the two axes of rotation (Figure 3.4). Because the counterweights rotate in opposite directions, the net force on the shaker basket is zero except along a line passing through the shakers center of gravity. The resultant shaker motion is therefore linear. The angle of this line of motion is usually at 45-50 relative to the shaker deck to achieve maximum solids conveyance. Because acceleration is applied through the shaker CG, the basket is dynamically balanced; the same pattern of motion will exist at all points along the shaker.
3.4
Shale Shakers Solids Conveyance and Liquid Throughput Linear motion shakers have become the shaker of choice for most applications because of their superior solids conveyance and fluid-handling capacity. Solids can be strongly conveyed uphill by linear motion. The uphill deck configuration allows a pool of liquid to form at the shaker's feed end to provide additional head and high fluid throughput capability. This allows the use of fine screens to improve separation performance. The Derrick Flo-Line Cleaner is one example of a linear motion shale shaker. One drawback to linear motion shakers is their relatively poor performance in processing gumbo. The short vibration stroke length when combined with long, basket lengths, uphill deck angles and strong acceleration forces tends to make the soft gumbo patties adhere to the screen cloth. Some success has been reported by using linear motion shakers with short deck lengths and horizontal or downhill deck angles. Recommended Applications
All applications where fine screening is required.
Figure 3.4
Linear Motion. All areas move in a synchronous linear motion.
Balanced Elliptical Motion

Amoco's analytical shaker dynamics model has predicted that this is the optimum vibration pattern for maximum solids conveyance. Unlike unbalanced elliptical motion, all points on the shaker basket move in phase with the identical elliptical pattern. The model predicts that a thin ellipse will provide solids conveyance
3.5
Solids Control Manual superior even to linear motion. Because elliptical motion provides a softer acceleration pattern than linear motion, it is likely that screen life may also be improved. A simple and commercially-viable method to achieve balanced elliptical motion has recently been tested. The vibrators are located as shown in Figure 3.5. The vertical orientation of the vibrators dictates the shape of the ellipse. The more the vibrators are tilted out from the shaker basket, the more circular the vibration pattern.
Figure 3.5
Balanced Elliptical Motion. This motion is the most efficient in conveying solids.
Full-scale experiments have verified analytical model predictions of improved solids conveyance with a thin ellipse. In Figure 3.6, the numbers in parentheses are the ratios of major axis length to minor axis length of the vibration patterns. By adjusting the shape of the ellipse, solids conveyance velocity can be adjusted without changing deck angle or acceleration normal to the screen. This feature has potential for optimizing cuttings conveyance with respect to oil retention on cuttings.
Vibration Dynamics
Acceleration
During the vibration cycle, the shaker basket undergoes acceleration which changes in both magnitude and direction. As discussed previously, the placement of the vibrators determines the vibration pattern and therefore the net acceleration direction during the vibration cycle. The mass of the counterweights and the frequency of the vibration determine the magnitude of the acceleration. The vertical component of acceleration has the most effect on shaker liquid throughput. We relate the vertical components of acceleration and stroke length to frequency by the following equation:
stroke ( in.) RPM Gs = ------------------------------------------------70, 400
2
3.6
Shale Shakers
Acceleration (normal to screen), Gs
Figure 3.6
Conveyance Velocity. The shape of the ellipse controls conveyance velocity. A thin ellipse conveys solids faster than linear motion.
where the stroke length is the total vertical distance travelled by the shaker basket and the G-force is measured from midpoint to peak. An acceleration of one G is the standard acceleration due to gravity (386 in./sec2). Most shakers operate at accelerations within the range of 2.5-5.0 Gs, depending upon the vibration pattern. Field experience has shown this range offers the best compromise between throughput capacity and screen life. Many manufacturers report the acceleration of linear motion shakers along the line of motion. This yields a larger number and looks good on the specification sheet. However, unless the angle of vibration is also specified, it reveals little about the performance of the shaker. The G's for shale shakers listed in the appendix are calculated for the direction normal to the screen surface. Some shakers have adjustable counterweights to vary acceleration (Figure 3.7). Although flow capacity and cuttings dryness improves with increased acceleration, screen life is negatively affected. By reducing the Gs when extra flow capacity is available, screen life may be improved.
Frequency (RPM), Stroke Length

The vibrator frequency of most shale shakers is not normally adjustable. The vibrators typically rotate at a nominal rpm of 1200 or 1800 at 60 Hz. Stroke length
3.7
Figure 3.7
Adjustable Vibrator Counterweights. Other designs are used, this is the most simple.
varies inversely with rpm. A higher rpm will result in a shorter stroke length at the same acceleration. The effect of vibrator frequency and stroke length on shaker processing rate has been evaluated in the laboratory. The results of these tests show improved shaker flow capacity in the presence of solids with decreased rpm (or conversely, increased stroke length) at the same G level. (Figure 3.8). Therefore, the term high speed should not be used to mean high performance since the opposite relationship is often more correct. The main disadvantage to lower frequency shale shakers is that the mud tends to bounce much higher off the screens and cover the area around the shakers with a fine coating of mud. More frequent housekeeping is required to maintain a safe environment around the shakers. Longer stroke lengths also tend to reduce screen life.
Deck Angle
Because linear motion shakers will convey uphill, most provide an easily-adjustable deck angle feature to optimize fluid throughput capacity and cuttings conveyance velocity. Uphill deck angles also provide protection against overflow due to surges at the flow line.
3.8
Shale Shakers
Figure 3.8
Shaker Throughput vs. Vibrator Frequency. Shaker throughput improves as frequency decreases.
At deck angles greater than 3, solids grinding in the pool region can be a problem. Although fluid throughput increases with uphill deck angle, cuttings conveyance decreases. Solids conveyance within the pool region is slower than out of the pool due to viscous drag forces and the differential pressure created across the cuttings load by the hydrostatic head of the fluid. If the deck angle is too high, a stationary mound of solids can build up in the pool even though conveyance is observed at the discharge end (Figure 3.9). The vibrating action of the screen and extended residence time will tend to grind soft or friable cuttings before they have the opportunity to be conveyed out of the pool. This condition should be avoided since the generation of fines in the mud is definitely not desired. To check for this problem, observe the feed end of the shaker at a connection immediately after circulation is stopped. There should not be a disproportionate amount of solids accumulated at the feed end. The problem can be rectified by lowering the deck angle until the solids mound is eliminated.
3.9
Figure 3.9
Solids Bed Buildup. This may occur when the shaker deck is tilted up too high.
Screen Fastening and Support

The type of screen panel dictates the type and amount of support and fastening system necessary. The screen fastening and support structure provide the following functions: 1. Prevent leakage past the screens 2. Expedite screen replacement 3. Provide even tension on screens to extend screen life The two types of screen panels are commonly labelled as pretensioned and nonpretensioned panels. However, these terms do not exactly describe their construction since many nonpretensioned panels are, indeed, pretensioned. The terms rigid frame and hookstrip more correctly differentiate the two main panel types.
Hookstrip Screen Panels

This is the most common type of panel, consisting of one to three layers of screen cloth. The cloth is frequently bonded to a thin perforated-metal grid plate or a plastic grid. Figure 3.10 shows the construction of a typical hookstrip screen. The
3.10
Shale Shakers screen panel is tensioned on the shaker deck by an interlocked hookstrip and drawbar arrangement located on both sides of the shaker (Figure 3.11). Three or more tensioning bolts are used to pull each drawbar down and towards the side of the basket. This seats the screen on the shaker deck and distributes even tension along the hookstrip.
Figure 3.10
Typical Hookstrip Screen. The backing grid, though not necessary, provides support and improves screen life.
Figure 3.11
Hookstrip Screen Tensioners. This is the most common type of fastening system for hookstrip screens.
These panels are not rigid; the shaker deck must be crowned to maintain screen-to-deck contact throughout the vibration cycle. Support ribs in the shaker
3.11
Solids Control Manual deck are designed to ensure even support of the screen across the width of the basket. Full contact with all support stringers is critical, especially with metal-backed panels. The panels will suffer premature fatigue failure if flexing is allowed to occur. Because screen tension is extremely important to ensure good screen life, the tension should be checked frequently on nonpretensioned hookstrip-style screens. Spring-loaded tensioning bolts are recommended to aid in preventing a complete loss of tension and premature failure as the screens stretch and seat onto the deck. Tensioning springs are not required for hookstrip panels with metal backing plates since these panels will not normally stretch. The crowned deck can cause uneven fluid coverage (Figure 3.12). The mud may extend further out along the sides of the shaker than at the center where maximum deck height occurs. This reduces the effective screening area of the shaker, especially at low deck angles. It can lead to whole mud losses at the discharge and contribute to unacceptably wet cuttings even though the fluid endpoint along the centerline of the shaker may be well back from the discharge. The problem can be mitigated by increasing the deck angle and selecting high efficiency screens to reduce fluid coverage area. Screen replacement time is usually much longer than with rigid frame panels. However, Derrick has developed a new tension bolt design which has improved screen changing on their Flo-Line Cleaner; the tensioning nut and spring have been replaced by an integral nut and spring assembly which requires a half-turn to fully operate.
Rigid Frame (Pretensioned) Screen Panels

In rigid frame screen panel construction, the screen cloth is tensioned and bonded to an integral steel frame; no additional tensioning is required. Because rigid frame screens are flat, uneven fluid coverage on the shaker is not a problem. All other factors being equal, discharged cuttings dryness is reported to be superior to shakers with hookstrip screen designs. Since no tensioning is required during installation, the fastening system can be designed for fast panel replacement. For example, each panel on the Fluid Systems Model 500 is held in place by two wedges (one on each side). A tap on the wedge locks the panel in place. The Thule VSM100 has a pneumatically-actuated system. Sweco's LF-3 Oil-Mizer and Brandt's ATL-1000 also have quick-release fastening systems. The two most common types of pretensioned panels are shown in Figure 3.14 and Figure 3.13.
3.12
Shale Shakers
Figure 3.12
Shaker Fluid Endpoints. Crowned decks will cause uneven fluid coverage especially at low deck angles.
1. The screen cloth is tensioned and glued directly to the steel frame. Additional glue lines may be included between the frame members to provide additional support. The bonding pattern divides the panel into 3- to 4-in. wide strips oriented parallel to the flow. This design is used in the Fluid Systems Model 500. This panel design maximizes usable screening area. However, the large unsupported area normally limits cloth selection to the heavier grades with lower flow capacity. The panel is not normally considered repairable. 2. Alternatively, the screen cloth may be bonded to a perforated metal backing plate similar to a hookstrip screen. The metal backing plate is then bonded to the support frame to create a rigid panel. The Brandt ATL-1000 and the Thule VSM-100 use this type of panel.
3.13
Figure 3.13
Rigid Screen Panel with Perforated Plate. The metal grid is bonded to a steel frame.
Usable screen area is reduced by the perforated plated design, but this is offset by the option of using higher conductance screen cloth, repairability, and better screen life under high solids loading conditions.
3.14
Shale Shakers
Figure 3.14
Rigid Screen Panel. The screen cloth is glued directly to a steel frame.
Three Dimensional Screens

In recent years three dimensional screens have been introduced to the oil industry. This wave design increases the area of the screen by 40% over the flat screens. This increase in conductance is only relevant if the screen is completely submerged in drilling fluid. This reportedly increases the shaker capacity and allows for finer screening. A picture of a three dimensional screen is shown in Figure 3.14a.
3.15
Single Deck Shakers

As the name implies, a single deck shale shaker has one discrete screening layer; the mud and solids fed to the shaker are screened once. One or more screen panels may be used to provide a continuous screening surface. Deck profiles of single deck linear motion shakers are usually flat from feed to discharge, but other profiles are used. For example, the panels of the Fluid Systems Model 500 and Swaco ALS are arranged in a stairstep pattern: Each downstream panel is slightly lower than the upstream panel, primarily for ease of panel positioning. Unbalanced elliptical motion shakers, such as the Derrick Standard or Swaco Super Screen, have an increasingly negative (downhill) slope on downstream panels to improve solids conveyance. Single deck shakers provide the advantage of allowing complete access to the screening surface. This simplifies maintenance, panel changes, screen inspection and cleaning. The disadvantage of single deck shakers becomes apparent under high solids loading conditions; flow capacity, cuttings dryness and screen life may be greatly reduced. These problems can be circumvented by using a cascading shaker arrangement. (Refer to the following section: Cascading Shaker Systems.) Linear motion single deck shakers are preferred for most applications because of their simplicity, high flow capacity and fine-screening capability. Their popularity has spurred numerous companies to manufacture linear motion shakers. A complete list is provided in Appendix E, Equipment Specifications. Many of the major manufacturers shakers have been evaluated in laboratories. Differences in overall performance were found to be relatively minor. Examples of single deck linear motion shakers that will provide acceptable performance are pictured in Figures 3.15-3.20. The shakers are listed in alphabetical order, no ranking is implied by the order of their appearance.
3.16
Shale Shakers
Figure 3.15
Derrick Flo-Line Cleaner Plus.
Figure 3.16
Fluid Systems Model 500
3.17
Figure 3.17
Swaco ALS
Figure 3.18
Sweco LF-3 Oil-Mizer
3.18
Shale Shakers
Figure 3.19
Sweco LM-3
Figure 3.20
Triton NNF
3.19
Cascading Shaker Systems

Cascading refers to the use of shakers in series (the mud passes sequentially through two shakers) to remove drill cuttings in two stages. The first set of shakers remove or scalp the coarsest cuttings from the returned drilling fluid. The mud and fine cuttings are then fed to a second set of shakers with finer screens. This arrangement increases the capacity of the fine screen shakers through reduced solids loading. This arrangement is especially effective when drilling fast, large diameter hole sections or gumbo formations. Figure 3.21 illustrates a 2 over 3" cascading shaker arrangement. This arrangement usually provides adequate shale shaker solids removal for drilling most 17-1/2-in. diameter holes. It is important to ensure that valves are provided to isolate each shaker in the system as required for screen maintenance and shaker repair.
Figure 3.21
Cascading Shaker System
In most instances, unbalanced elliptical or circular motion shakers are the preferred scalping devices. Soft, sticky cuttings such as gumbo are generally handled better by these vibration patterns with a flat or downhill deck angle. However, linear motion shakers have been successfully used as scalpers when the deck angle is steeply pitched downhill (such as a Derrick Standard) or when the deck length is short (such as the Fluid Systems two-panel shaker). Because the scalping shakers must be positioned above the fine screen shakers, sufficient height between the flow nipple and the scalping shaker weirs must be
3.20
Shale Shakers available to avoid solids settling in the return line. A good rule of thumb is 1 ft of drop per 12 ft of flowline. Also, additional space is obviously necessary to accommodate a cascading system.
Unitized Cascading Systems

A unitized cascading system incorporates two shakers, one stacked over the other, on a single skid. This design reduces many of the plumbing problems and costs normally associated with retrofitting a cascading system on a rig. Also, the unitized system takes up less floor area than a standard cascading system. Because the top and bottom shaker are separate units, each can be designed for its specific function without severely impeding screen panel access or performance. This is an advantage over integral tandem deck shakers. There are two disadvantages to unitized cascading systems: (1) They have high weirs which will limit their application to rigs with sufficient elevation difference between the flow nipple and the upper shaker weir; and (2) the upper shaker may be too high to be worked on easily. A permanent walkway or ladder should be installed to improve access to the upper shakers screens. Two systems are currently available: The Brandt ATL-CS (Figure 3.22) and the Fluid Systems Model 50-500. The Brandt is a tandem deck, circular motion basket over a linear motion basket. The Fluid Systems version uses a short, two-panel linear motion basket as the scalping shaker over their standard Model 500 shaker.
Integral Tandem Deck Shakers

These shakers incorporate two distinct screening decks stacked in a single basket. The top deck screen scalps off the coarse solids to reduce the solids loading to the lower screens. Tandem deck shakers are available in both circular and linear motion designs. The superior fluid processing and finer screening features of linear motion shakers are preferred. In either case, flow back pans are recommended to improve throughput. Tandem deck shakers offer a compromise between a true cascading system and single deck shakers. If the top scalping deck covers the entire basket width, solids handling capacity is good. However, accessibility to the lower deck screens and the ability to monitor screen wear is limited. Conversely, a small scalping deck limits solids loading capacity, but improves accessibility and screen monitoring. Tandem deck shakers are recommended for medium-high solids loading applications or where space or height limitations will not permit the use of a cascading shaker system.
3.21
Solids Control Manual The total combined area of both screening surfaces cannot be used to compare the performance of these shakers to single deck shakers. The relative processing capacity of tandem deck shakers will depend upon the size distribution of the solids in the feed, solids generation rate and other factors. Generally, tandem deck shakers will outperform single deck shakers when large diameter hole and high penetration rates are encountered. Examples of linear motion tandem deck shakers are shown in Figures 3.23-3.25.
Figure 3.22
Brandt ATL-CS. This is one example of a unitized cascading shaker arrangement.
3.22
Shale Shakers
Figure 3.23
Brandt ATL 1000
Figure 3.24
Derrick Cascade System
3.23
Figure 3.25
Thule VSM 100
Shaker Manifolds
The flowline and manifold system must be designed to provide an even distribution of mud and cuttings to the shakers. The flow line must have sufficient drop to prevent solids from accumulating in the line: A drop of 1 ft per 12 ft of run is a good rule of thumb. Flowline diameter must also be sufficient to handle the maximum anticipated circulation rates. Diameters of 10 or 12 in. are usually sufficient. Manifolding can be a problem when three or more shakers are arranged in parallel. Because the shaker feed is essentially two-phase, liquid being one phase and solids the other phase, equal division of both phases can become difficult to achieve with typical manifold designs (Figure 3.26 and Figure 3.27). Branch tees should be avoided. The solids will preferentially travel a straight path, resulting in uneven solids loading to the shakers. Dead end tees will distribute the solids more evenly. Examples of recommended manifold designs for multi-shaker installations
3.24
Shale Shakers are provided in Figure 3.28, Figure 3.29, and Figure 3.30. Overhead or circular manifolds will provide better distribution of mud and solids. All shakers should be level with equal weir heights to ensure even flow distribution. A common shaker box (possum belly) is acceptable for scalping shakers. It is not recommended for the fine screen shakers since a large shaker box only serves to collect solids, which can enter the mud tanks if the bypass gate is opened.
Figure 3.26
Poor Manifold Design. Distribution to the shakers may be uneven.
Operating Guidelines
Optimizing Screen Life
Perforated plate screens usually exhibit longer screen life than other hookstrip screens. They provide the most support and are repairable. 1. Screen life is inversely proportional to plate opening size. If premature wear is apparent in the pool region, install panels with smaller perforated plate sizes at the feed end of the shaker where loading and wear is greatest. 2. Reduce deck angles to improve solids conveyance, reduce loading and eliminate solids grinding at the feed end.
3.25
Figure 3.27
Better Manifold Design. There are less branch tees in this design.
Figure 3.28
Best Conventional Manifold Design. All branch tees are eliminated.
3.26
Shale Shakers
Figure 3.29
Circular Manifold Design. Useful for odd number of shakers. Flowline lengths are exaggerated.
3. If premature backing plate failure is experienced, check that all deck rubbers are in place and in good condition. Check for a buildup of solids between the screen and the support areas on the shaker deck.
Screen Selection
1. When possible, run the same screen mesh over the entire deck of a single deck shaker. When running different mesh cannot be avoided, the coarser mesh should be run at the discharge end. Do not vary the mesh size by more than one increment from feed to discharge. 2. Select the finest screens which will give 70-80% fluid coverage on the shaker (Exception: See cuttings dryness discussion). 3. Always run the coarser screens on the top deck of a tandem deck shaker or on the upstream shaker. The upper deck screen should be at least two mesh sizes coarser than the bottom deck. It has been observed that running screens which are too fine on the top deck can actually impede cuttings conveyance on the lower deck.
3.27
Figure 3.30
Overhead Manifold Design. Excellent for even distribution of liquid and solids, but more complicated to fabricate.
4. Select screens for which the new API designations are known to ensure predictable performance.
Cuttings Dryness
The volume of drilling fluid lost with the discharged cuttings is becoming more important in the wake of increasingly stringent environmental regulations and more expensive drilling fluid formulations. In most cases, minimizing liquid waste from the shale shakers makes both economic and environmental sense. A field procedure to determine composition of the discharge is given in Appendix C, Solids Control Equipment Discharge Analysis, Oil-Based muds. Shaker discharge dryness is heavily dependent upon the size distribution of the cuttings and the viscosity of the mud. There will always be an irreducible volume fraction of fluid wetting the cuttings and this will vary inversely with particle size. Extremely fine solids have substantially higher percentages of associated liquid than larger solids due to surface area and surface tension effects. Mud viscosity will also impact the thickness of this fluid layer.
3.28
Shale Shakers The shaker can remove a portion of this residual wetness by the acceleration and impact forces imparted on the cuttings after they exit the pool region. Dryness may depend on the magnitude of these forces and the exposure time. Since a substantial portion of the shaker screening area can be covered by the liquid pool to achieve a desired separation, the remaining dry screening area may not be sufficient to remove excess moisture carried with the cuttings. High solids loading rates will also have a negative impact on cuttings dryness. Solids loading and dry screening area can be addressed during the planning phase by ensuring that sufficient shaker area is available to maximize cuttings dryness. The following remedial actions may help improve cuttings dryness: 1. Deck Angle Increase - This is the most simple solution. Fluid loss along the hookstrips is reduced. Solids conveyance will decrease with steeper deck inclinations, which increases the contact time to remove excess moisture. Protection against whole mud losses due to flowline surges is also improved. The reduction in fluid coverage is not necessarily proportional to the deck angle selected. Because conveyance is lessened, the solids remain in the pool longer and can interfere with the ability of the fluid to pass through the screen, especially at higher solids loading rates. This may retard the formation of a shorter, deeper pool. Also, solids grinding may become a problem. 2. High Efficiency Screens - Screens with high transmittance values will reduce fluid coverage and increase dry screening area. Two new screens, the Derrick Pyramid and Cagles HCR series offer distinct advantages in this application. The corrugated Pyramid design may reduce mud loss along the hookstrips and offers increased screening area. Cagles HCR cloth has very high transmittance values and has exhibited service life up to 4 times standard DX designs. 3. Coarser Screens - This has two effects. First, the fluid endpoint on the shaker will recede, and second, the average discharged cuttings size will increase. However, this action usually carries with it the penalty of poorer separation efficiency and higher costs, unless downstream solids removal equipment picks up the slack. Try running a coarser screen at the discharge end before converting the entire deck to coarser screens. There are special considerations worth mentioning depending upon the mud system in use: Unweighted Muds The importance of fine screening in unweighted muds is typically not as critical, provided: 1) sufficient hydrocyclones and centrifuges are used, and 2) the cuttings are not soft and easily degraded by centrifugal pumps. In fact, significant fluid savings in oil-based muds have been realized by running coarser
3.29
Solids Control Manual screens on the shakers to produce a dry discharge and transferring a greater share of the solids removal to the downstream centrifuges. Weighted Muds In weighted muds, the importance of the shaker in the solids removal system generally precludes the option of running coarser screens. Economics usually dictate that the finest separation possible be made by the shaker without substantial loss of barite in the discharge. Drill cuttings missed by the shaker will remain in the circulating system and eventually contribute to a low gravity solids buildup and subsequent viscosity increase. 4. G Force Increase - Increased shaker acceleration will help remove excess liquid by overcoming part of the surface tension forces which bind the fluid to the cuttings. Conversely, cuttings conveyance velocity will increase and screen life will decrease. Conveyance velocity can be reduced by increasing the deck inclination, but screen life will decline considerably at accelerations above 4 Gs.
Sticky Solids (Gumbo)

1. Use scalping shakers ahead of fine screen shakers. Circular or unbalanced elliptical motion shakers or shakers with short basket lengths are recommended as the scalping shakers. If space is limited, tandem deck linear motion shakers may be used. 2. Use downhill or flat deck angles. Gumbo will not convey well uphill. 3. Gumbo will not stick as persistently to wet screens. When spray bars are necessary to keep the screens wet, use low flow rate nozzles which produce a fine mist with an umbrella or fan-shaped discharge. These nozzles operate at less than 0.5 gpm. No more than two are normally required. Do not use high volume or high pressure sprays on a continuous basis. This will degrade the gumbo patties and drive the solids through the screens.
Polymer Muds
1. Prehydrate and preshear the polymer before adding into the active mud system to eliminate fish-eyes and blinding at the shaker. 2. Select high efficiency screens to maximize the flow capacity of the shakers. 3. Expect an overall reduction in shaker flow capacity of as much as 40%.
3.30
Shale Shakers
Blinding, Plugging
1. Gilsonite (Asphaltenes) Triple-layer screens are susceptible to plugging by gilsonite or other asphaltene-based products in the drilling fluid. The problem may be mitigated by selecting single or double-layer screens. For example, on Derrick Flo-Line Cleaners, use the PBP HP or GBG HP series. Refer to Appendix D, Screen Designations, for a complete list of screen panel descriptions. 2. Sand (Near Size)
Unbonded triple layer screens provide the best resistance to blinding, but screen life is generally poor. Single layer, square mesh cloth is most susceptible to blinding. Select screen series with aspect ratios greater than 1.4. (Refer to Chapter 4, Shaker Screens.) If excess shaker capacity is available, try running a finer screen. The sands may have a relatively narrow size distribution which might not blind a smaller opening size.
Lost Circulation Material

1. Do not bypass the shakers to avoid screening out the LCM material. 2. Scalping shakers can be used to recover LCM when high concentrations are continuously required in the mud, provided:
Cuttings size distribution is sufficiently fine to pass through the scalping screens. Solids loading rates do not negatively impact the performance of the downstream shakers and cause solids buildup in the active system. The LCM removed by the scalpers is returned to the active system downstream of the centrifuge.
3.31
Estimating Number of Shakers Required

1. Base the number of shakers required on the economics and the physical constraints of the specific application. 2. A ballpark estimate of shaker requirements, based on average drilling conditions can be made from Table 3.1. This is a very rough estimate and should be used only as a guide.
Table 3.1 Shakers Required Approximate Number of High Performance Linear Motion Shakers Maximum Viscosity (cP) 5 300 400 500 Circulation Rate (gpm) 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4
1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4
1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4
1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4
2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4
2 2 3 3 3 4 4
2 2 3 3 4 4
3.32
Shale Shakers
Summary
The shale shaker is the only solids control device that makes a separation based on the physical size of the particle. The separation size is dictated by the opening sizes in the shaker screens. Hydrocyclones and centrifuges separate solids based on differences in their relative mass and the fluid. Shale shakers with linear vibratory motion are preferred for most applications because of their superior processing capacity and fine-screening ability. Circular motion or unbalanced elliptical motion shakers are recommended as scalping shakers in cascading systems. Vibration of the shaker basket creates G-forces which help drive shear thinning fluids such as drilling mud through the screens. Vibration also conveys solids off the screens. Most linear motion shakers operate in the range of 3 to 4 Gs to balance throughput with screen life. G-force is a function of vibration frequency (rpm) and stroke length. High-speed should not be equated with high performance. Laboratory tests indicate that, in the normal operating range for linear motion shale shakers, lower frequency vibration and longer stroke lengths improve throughput capacity. Most linear motion shakers operate at 1200 to 1800 rpm. Avoid deck inclinations above 3. High deck angles reduce solids conveyance and increase the risk of grinding soft or friable solids through the screens. Shakers are designed to accept either hookstrip or rigid frame screen panels. Hookstrip screen panels are the most common and are usually cheaper, although cuttings wetness can be a concern due to deck curvature. Flat, rigid frame panels promote even fluid coverage, but can cost more. Shakers may have single or tandem screening decks. Single deck shakers offer mechanical simplicity and full access to the screening surface. Single deck shakers may be arranged to process mud sequentially as a cascading system to improve performance under high solids loading conditions. Tandem deck shakers offer improved processing capacity under high solids loading conditions when space is limited. Manifolds should provide even distribution of mud and solids to each shaker. Avoid branch tees. Recommended manifold designs are illustrated. Operating guidelines are provided for optimizing screen life and cuttings dryness, handling sticky solids, polymer muds, blinding and LCM problems.
3.33
3.34
Chapter 4. Shaker Screens
Shaker screen selection has the largest impact on the overall performance of the shale shaker. It is therefore important to understand the factors which may impact screen performance and how to properly select screens. Shaker screen performance is measured by: 1. Separation Performance - the size of the solids removed 2. Liquid Throughput Performance - the capability of the screen to transmit fluid 3. Service life
Separation Performance
Grade Efficiency
The separation performance of a shale shaker screen (or any other solids control device) is commonly represented by its percent-s99eparated, or grade efficiency, curve. This curve is generated from full-scale experimental measurements and depicts the percent solids removed as a function of particle size. It reports the screen's probability of separating any specific particle size with a given shaker under conditions specific to the test. Grade efficiency is the preferred measure of separation performance because it is independent of feed particle size distribution. An example of a percent-separated curve is shown in Figure 4.1. In this example, the median size separated by the screen was 145 microns. This means that 50% of the solids with a diameter of 145 microns were removed. A rough estimate of the median cut point (d50) can be made in the field by the wet sieve procedure (see Field Procedure to Estimate Cut Point, p 4.9).
Separation Potential
A method was developed that characterize the relative separation efficiency potential of shaker screens without the expense and time required for full-scale testing. The technique links the relative separation performance of screens to a volume-equivalent distribution of their opening sizes. The screen's openings are measured using PC-based image analysis technology. Each opening in the screen is then represented by a spherical diameter corre-
4.1
Solids Control Manual sponding to an ellipsoidal volume calculated from the image analysis data. The cumulative volume of these ellipsoids, when plotted as a function of spherical diameter, yields a curve which correlates well with the standard grade efficiency curve. This curve represents the separation potential of the screen. The word potential is used because the screen's separation performance is not measured directly, but implied by the size of the screen's apertures. Note: Grade separation efficiencies as measured on the shaker are subject to specific shaker and flowline conditions. They may not always agree with separation potential values. For example, the separation potential value for a screen with rectangular openings may be pessimistic when drilling clean sand sections producing predominantly spherical sand grains. The image analysis method assumes solids of all shapes and sizes are available to the screen. However, on average, the separation potential values have been shown to adequately represent the screen's separation performance.
Figure 4.1
Percent Separated Curve. This curve indicates the percentage of solids removed as a function of particle size.
4.2
Shaker Screens
Liquid Throughput Performance

The liquid throughput capacity of a screen panel is primarily a function of screen conductance and usable area. Conductance describes the ease with which fluid can flow through a unit area of screen cloth. In simplistic terms, it is analogous to permeability with the length in the direction of flow (screen thickness) taken into account. Higher conductances will result in higher flow rates through the screen. Conductance is calculated from the mesh count and wire diameters of the screen cloth by the equations given in Appendix A, Conductance Calculation. Multilayer screens can also be handled by the conductance equation. The inverse of conductance for each screen layer is summed to equal the inverse of the net overall conductance: 1 1 1 1 ----- = ------ + ------ + -----Cn Ct C1 C 2 This is valid provided that the screen layers used in the composition are designed to remain in contact. Oilfield screens are typically bonded to a perforated metal panel or plastic grid to provide extra strength and improve service life. This practice eliminates some of the usable area through which fluid may pass. Some metal backing plate designs may reduce effective screening area by as much as 40 percent. Because conductance describes screen flow capacity per unit area, the usable unblocked area available for screening must also be considered when comparing the mud processing capacity of shaker screen panels.
Screen Life
The definition of acceptable screen life must be judged within the context of the total solids removal system economics. Besides screen replacement cost, consideration must be given to the costs of drilling mud dilution and waste disposal costs when determining whether longer screen life is warranted at the expense of solids removal efficiency. In weighted mud applications, the economic benefits of improved solids removal efficiency usually outweigh the additional screen costs.
Effect of Screen Composition

Only very general correlations may be made between screen composition and service life. Unfortunately, features that lead to improved life are usually detrimental to flow capacity. Using heavier wires with greater tensile strength or adding
4.3
Solids Control Manual supporting layers of cloth can both reduce conductance. Increasing support through additional bonding area (smaller plate openings) eliminates usable screening area. Also, support techniques and screen tension can have a major effect on screen life. As a result, screen panels are typically designed to balance flow capacity performance with screen life. Screen life is heavily dependent upon flow line conditions. Solids loading rate, drilled cuttings abrasiveness, and shaker dynamics can easily outweigh composition effects.
Effect of Vibration Pattern

Linear Motion
The abrupt changes in acceleration during the vibration cycle tends to cause screens to wear more quickly unless close attention is paid to tensioning and screen support techniques. Perforated metal backing plates and pretensioned screen panels have been specifically developed to address this problem. Linear motion shakers usually operate at less than 4.0 G's (normal to the screen) to balance screen life with processing capacity. Regardless, the finer screens normally run on linear motion shakers cannot be expected to outlast the coarser screens used in the past. For screens finer than 100 mesh, expect an average service life in excess of 100 hours.
Circular, Elliptical Motion

The smooth change in acceleration with respect to direction translates into longer screen life compared to other vibration patterns. However, many circular motion shakers were designed before the advent of fine mesh screens and may provide less support for the screens. This will tend to negate much of the screen life benefit associated with circular motion.
Shaker Screen Designations

Mesh Count
Shaker screens have traditionally been assigned mesh count designations by the manufacturer. Unfortunately, they do not adequately describe screen performance in terms of separation efficiency or flow capacity. Mesh count is defined as the number of openings per linear inch of screen cloth. Mesh count does not establish the size of screen openings unless wire diameter
4.4
Shaker Screens is known. The opening size, D, is related to the wire diameter, d, and the mesh count, n, by the following equation: 1 D = -- n d With the wide variety of wire diameters used to construct the same mesh count, the actual separation efficiencies of screens with the same mesh count designation are rarely consistent: 1. Manufacturers commonly designate layered screens by a single mesh count number. Experimental separation efficiency tests have revealed that these designations are predominantly optimistic. 2. Oblong mesh screens may be identified by a single number which may be the sum of mesh counts in both the horizontal and vertical direction. For example, a 60 x 40 mesh screen may be labelled 100 mesh. This practice is misleading: The opening sizes of a 60 x 40 mesh screen will pass much larger particles than a 100 x 100 square mesh screen.
API RP13E Screen Designation

Recently, a new performance-based screen designation system has been developed. This designation system has been adopted by the API RP13E as a Recommended Practice for Shale Shaker Screen Cloth Designations. The API has recommended that all screens be labelled with the following information: Screen Name Separation Potential (d50, d16, d84) Flow Capacity (Conductance, Total Non-Blanked Area) A comprehensive list of screen designations for most shakers is included in Appendix C, Screen Designations. The screen designations include additional information not specified by the API to further define screen performance. Each of the designation components are described in detail below:
Screen Name
This is the mesh count designation or part number used by the manufacturer to identify the screen. Typically, it consists of a mesh count number preceded by a letter code which may describe the screen's cloth type or layering technique. For example, MG100 signifies a 100 x 100 mesh market grade bolting cloth, a PWP HP100 signifies a perforated plate, triple-layer screen composed of oblong mesh screen cloth.
4.5
Equivalent U.S. Sieve Number

This is the U.S. Sieve Number which has the same median opening size, or d50, as the screen. Table 4.1 lists the opening sizes of the standard U.S. Sieve series. In cases where no actual U.S. Sieve exists for a given opening size, the equivalent U.S. Sieve Number is a linearly-interpolated value. This value provides a simple scale by which to quickly rank the separation potential of screens. Caution should be exercised when using this value to compare screens of different type since it represents only the median separation potential of the screen. Table 4.1 U.S. Sieve Series U.S. Sieve Number
3.5 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 25 30 35
Opening Size Microns

5660 4760 4000 3360 2830 2380 2000 1680 1410 1190 1000 840 710 590 500
U.S. Sieve Number

40 45 50 60 70 80 100 120 140 170 200 230 270 325 400
Opening Size Microns

420 350 297 250 210 177 149 125 105 88 74 62 53 44 37
Separation Potential (d50, d16, d84)

The separation potential of the screen is represented by 3 points on the separation potential curve, labelled d16, d50 and d84 (Figure 4.1). These points are the spherical diameters, in microns, corresponding to 16, 50 and 84 percent of the cumulative ellipsoidal volume distribution of hole sizes present in the screen. It must be stressed that these values provide a relative measure of a screen's potential ability to remove solids. They may not necessarily agree with measured grade efficiency cut points for a given application.
4.6
Shaker Screens d50 The d50 is the median aperture size of the screen on a volume-equivalent basis. In experimental grade efficiency terms, it is analogous to the size of solid that has a 50% probability of separation. The d50 is typically used as a single value indicator of separation efficiency performance. Because of it's importance, the d50 is listed first. d16, d84 The d16 and d84 values indicate the range of hole sizes present in the screen. The d16 and d84 values can be important when the removal of fines from an unweighted mud is desired, or when the removal of barite is a concern. The deviation from the d50 describes the screen's implied separation characteristics. As the difference between the d16 and d50 increases, it is more likely that some solids finer than the d50 will likely be removed. Conversely, a smaller percentage of solids coarser than the d50 may be removed as the difference between the d84 and d50 increases. A multilayered screen will generally have a larger spread between the d16 and d84 values than a single mesh screen with the same d50.
Flow Capacity (Conductance, Nonblanked Area)

The calculated conductance is reported in units of kilodarcies/millimeter for the total screen composition. Non-blanked area is the total effective screening area per panel, in units of square feet. Note: Support rails on the shaker deck can reduce the usable area of screens not mounted on metal backing plates. This area reduction is not included in the calculation of usable area because it is not a function of screen panel construction and will vary with the shaker type.
Transmittance
Transmittance represents the net flow capacity of individual screens. It is the product of conductance and unblocked screening area. Transmittance permits the comparison of individual screens which differ in usable screening area.
Aspect Ratio
Aspect ratio describes the average shape of the screen openings. It is the volume-weighted average length-to-width ratio of the screen openings. Aspect ratio serves as an indicator of screen composition and provides information about the screen's potential resistance to blinding.
4.7
Solids Control Manual Rectangular, or oblong, mesh screens have been customarily employed to reduce the blinding problems exhibited by square mesh screens when drilling sand sections. The near-size sand grains lodge in the square mesh screen apertures and reduce mud processing capability. The longer slots in the oblong screens are more likely to be only partially blocked by these spherical particles and thus tend to resist blinding. Aspect ratios in excess of 1.5 are typical of oblong mesh screens (both single and multilayered designs) used in the oil field. Single layer square mesh screens have aspect ratios near unity. Layered, unbonded, square mesh sandwich screens have the capacity to actively deblind (remove particles) by the interactive movement between the layers. This feature is lost when the layers are bonded together to improve screen life. Laboratory tests have shown that blinding increases substantially when the apertures in the metal backing plate or plastic grid have dimensions of less than 4 x 4 in. Figure 4.2 shows how blinding severely restricts the flow capacity of the shaker when smaller opening dimensions in the screen panel are used.
Figure 4.2
Effect of Plate Opening Size on Screen Blinding. Plate openings with dimensions less than 4 x 4 in. lose their deblinding ability.
Some improvement in blinding resistance over single layer square mesh cloth is still apparent in bonded, multilayer square mesh screens: Stacking one screen cloth over a slightly coarser cloth results in a wide range of hole sizes and shapes. Only the portion of the screen with openings near in size to the sand will tend to be blinded. Aspect ratios of layered square mesh screen compositions range from
4.8
Shaker Screens 1.3 to 1.5. The relationship between screen composition and blinding resistance is summarized in Table 4.2. Table 4.2 Blinding Resistance of Common Screens Screen Panel Composition
Single or double layer, square mesh Triple layer, square mesh, bonded Triple layer, square mesh, unbonded Rectangular mesh, all types
Aspect Ratio
< 1.2 1.3-1.5 1.3-1.5 > 1.5
Blinding Resistance
poor fair best* better
* provides active deblinding through layer interaction
Field Procedure to Estimate Cut Point (D50)

Note: This procedure provides only a rough approximation of the cutpoint. It assumes that the mass flowrate of the solids discard is negligible compared to the feed and screen unders. Results may be inaccurate under high solids loading.
Equipment
U.S. Test Sieves (Enough sizes to bracket expected cut) Sample Containers Sand Content Tube and Funnel
Procedure
1. Take equal sized samples of both feed and unders. Avoid taking unders samples at the point where the fluid enters the sand trap. Where possible, take them from directly under the screen. 2. Wet sieve each sample and measure the volume retained on each sieve using sand content tube. 3. Calculate the percent separated for each test sieve by the following method: Feed Vol. Unders Vol. %Separated = ----------------------------------------------------------- 100 Feed Vol. 4. Plot through the midpoint of each sieve range as a function of volume percent removed. 5. Read the median cut point (d50).
4.9
Summary

Shaker screens control the separation and liquid throughput performance of the shale shaker. Separation performance may be measured by two methods: A. Percent-separated or grade efficiency. Generated from full-scale measurements, a grade efficiency curve represents the screens probability of separating any specific particle size under the specific conditions of the test. The median separation of the screen, commonly called the d50 or cut point, represents the particle size that has a 50% probability of being removed. A field procedure is provided to estimate the d50 of the shaker screens. B. Separation potential. This method uses the range of opening sizes in the screen to indicate the relative separation performance of the screen. Because the screen is visually analyzed, separation potential is independent of operating conditions. This method has been adopted by the API as a Recommended Practice for Shaker Screen Cloth Designations under API RP13E.
Liquid throughput performance is represented by the screens conductance and usable screening area. Conductance, calculated from the physical dimensions of the screen composition, is analogous to the screens permeability. The conductance equations are included in Appendix A, Conductance Calculation. Usable screening area is the area in the screen panel available for fluid flow. Mesh count designations do not adequately describe screen performance because wire diameters and opening sizes are not consistent, and layered screen compositions are not correctly represented. The API RP13E recommends that all screens be labeled with: screen name, separation potential (d50, d16, d84), and flow capacity (conductance and total nonblanked area). Appendix C, Screen Designations, contains screen designations and discusses the relative merits of specific screen types for most shaker and screen combinations.
4.10
Chapter 5. Degassers
Degassers are necessary to remove entrained gas bubbles from the mud. Gas-cut mud will impair the performance of centrifugal pumps. Since all solids removal equipment beyond the shakers requires a pump, the gas must be removed before it reaches these devices. If left unchecked and pumped downhole, the entrained gas will reduce mud density, which will, in turn, reduce the hydrostatic head in the wellbore. The fundamental principle for all degassers is that gas bubbles must reach the liquid-gas interface before they will burst. Any action which brings these gas bubbles to the surface will result in degassing. Four basic mechanisms exist for bringing gas to the surface: 1) increase the bubble size by drawing a vacuum, 2) create a thin film, 3) create turbulent action, and 4) impart centrifugal force on the mud to drive the gas bubbles to surface. There are two basic types of degassers: atmospheric degassers and vacuum degassers. Tests were conducted that show that vacuum degassers provide superior performance in the presence of higher mud weights and yield points greater than 10 lb/100 ft2. Atmospheric degassers are acceptable for unweighted muds with low yield points. The overall ranking of degasser models resulting from experimental data is given in Table 5.1. Table 5.1 Ranking of Degasser Models Manufacturer
Drexel-Brandt Derrick* Wellco Sweco Burgess Swaco Totco Tillet Gas Hog Drilco Sweco Judco
Type
Vacuum Vacuum Vacuum Vacuum Vacuum Vacuum Vacuum Atmospheric Atmospheric Atmospheric Atmospheric
* Not tested but similar in design to Drexel-Brandt
5.1
Solids Control Manual A complete list of available degassers and their processing capacities are listed in Appendix E, Equipment Specifications.
Placement and Operation

1. Provide enough degasser capacity to treat at least 100% of the circulation rate. Be aware that actual processing rates for gas-cut mud are much lower than claimed rates for water. 2. Degassers should be located downstream from the shale shakers and upstream of any equipment requiring a centrifugal pump. The degasser suction should be installed downstream of the sand trap. The suction entry should be approximately 1 ft from the floor in a well-agitated compartment. 3. The equalizer flow between the degasser suction and discharge must be high. There should be a visible backflow across the high weir, indicating full processing of the circulation rate. If equalization is low, the light gas-cut mud entering the suction compartment may not be able to displace the heavier mud returning from the discharge compartment. As a result, the light mud may overflow the suction compartment. Figure 5.1 illustrates correct fluid routing for degassers.
Figure 5.1
Correct Degasser Operation. The high weir helps ensure complete processing of gas cut mud.
4. Atmospheric degassers should discharge horizontally across the surface of the tank to allow large gas bubbles to break out. Vacuum type degassers should discharge below the mud surface with the flow turned up towards surface.
5.2
Degassers 5. Vacuum degassers must take power mud suction from their discharge compartment. Power mud is the mud pumped at high velocity through an eductor to create the vacuum in the degasser tank. Taking suction upstream will likely result in the pump becoming gas-locked. Suction from further downstream will likely cause mud to bypass the hydrocyclones. 6. The power mud centrifugal pump must supply the necessary feed head. Install a pressure or head gauge to monitor the feed head at the eductor.
5.3
Summary

Degassers are used to remove entrained gas bubbles from the mud to prevent impairment of centrifugal pump performance, a reduction in mud density and a subsequent reduction in hydrostatic head in the wellbore. There are two basic types of degassers: atmospheric and vacuum. Vacuum degassers are recommended for weighted muds and yield points over 10 lb/100 ft2. Atmospheric degassers are acceptable for unweighted, low viscosity muds. An overall ranking of degasser models resulting from experimental data is provided in this chapter. Vacuum desgassers are generally superior. A comprehensive list of available degassers is listed in Appendix E, Equipment Specifications. Provide enough degasser capacity to process over 100% of the circulating rate. Locate the degasser downstream of the shakers and upstream of any centrifugal pumps.
5.4
Chapter 6. Hydrocyclones
Although the shale shaker is considered the primary solids removal device on the rig, hydrocyclones are a cost-effective method of removing many of the fine solids missed by the shaker in unweighted muds. In some formations, the solids are too fine for the shakers to remove; hydrocyclones must be relied upon to remove the majority of the solids. In these instances, the shaker protects the hydrocyclones from oversize particles which may cause plugging. Because the hydrocyclone has no moving parts, it can be a very reliable piece of solids removal equipment when correctly operated and maintained.
Think of a tornado inside a bottle and you have a rudimentary idea of how a hydrocyclone operates. Figure 6.1 illustrates the basic concepts of hydrocyclone operating principles. Mud enters the feed chamber tangentially at a high velocity provided by pump pressure. As the mud spirals downward through the conical section, centrifugal force and inertia cause the solids to gravitate towards the wall. The solids settle according to their mass, a function of both density and volume. Since the density range of drilled solids is normally quite narrow, size has the largest influence on settling. The largest particles will settle preferentially. As the cone narrows, the innermost layers of fluid turn back toward the overflow creating a low pressure vortex in the center of the cone. This low pressure area causes air to be pulled in from the underflow outlet. Correctly-operating cones should exhibit a slight vacuum at the cone underflow. The air and cleaned fluid then report to the overflow through the vortex finder. The purpose of the vortex finder is to prevent some of the feed mud from short-circuiting directly into the overflow. Solids with sufficient mass cannot make the turn back towards the overflow because of their momentum and continue out the underflow. Maximum cone wear usually occurs at or near the underflow exit, where velocities are the highest. In cones having a balanced design whole mud losses out the underflow are slight. Only the solids and bound liquid will report to the underflow. If the solids are too fine to be removed by the cyclone, no liquid should be discharged. Unbalanced hydrocyclones will discharge mud without the presence of solids in the mud. Because fine solids have more specific area (surface area per unit volume) than large particles, the amount of liquid removed per pound of solids is higher with fine solids than with coarse solids. Therefore, the difference between the feed and
6.1
Figure 6.1
Hydrocyclone Operating Principles. The dark ribbon indicates the path taken by the mud and soilds entering the cone. The smaller light ribbon shows the exit path of the cleaned fluid and fine solids.
6.2
Hydrocyclones underflow density is not a reliable indicator of hydrocyclone performance. Figure 6.2 shows the relationship between underflow density and cone efficiency for an unweighted mud. Observe how overall cone efficiency decreases as underflow density increases.
Figure 6.2
Cone Efficiency. Decreasing underflow diameter to improve dryness impairs cone efficiency.
Performance Parameters
Oilfield hydrocyclones are available in cone diameters ranging from 1 in. to 12 in. Hydrocyclones were first used to reduce the API sand content (solids larger than 74 microns). Hence the term desander. By convention, hydrocyclones with diameters of 6 in. or larger are labelled as desanders. As the benefits of smaller, more efficient hydrocyclones became apparent, the term desilter was coined to reflect the smaller silt-sized particles these smaller cones could remove. Hydrocyclones with diameters of less than 5 in. are usually
6.3
Solids Control Manual called desilters. However, these terms are not based on any particular performance standard. Separation efficiency varies widely among hydrocyclones classified as desilters. The Industry has investigated the operational and geometric design factors affecting hydrocyclone performance. Over 500 tests were conducted using bentonite and ground silica slurries. The effect of these variables on cone performance are summarized in Table 6.1. Selected variables are discussed below. Table 6.1 Effect of Variables on Hydrocyclone Performance Major Effect
Cone Diameter Feed Solids Distribution Plastic Viscosity Feed Head Cone Angle Underflow Diameter Yield Point Inlet Type Cylinder Length Vortex Finder Length
Minor Effect
Feed Solids Concentration (at constant PV)
1) Cone Diameter
Cone diameter is the main factor in determining processing capacity, provided the basic design is sound. Larger cone diameters have higher throughput capacity and generally display inferior separation performance. Individual cone capacity guidelines are listed in Table 6.2. Table 6.2 Cone Capacity Cone Size, inches
2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12
Cone Capacity, gpm @ 75 ft head

20 50 50 75 100 125 500 500
6.4
Hydrocyclones
2) Plastic Viscosity
Hydrocyclone performance is extremely sensitive to the plastic viscosity of the feed mud. Figure 6.3 shows the effect of plastic viscosity on median separation size (d50) for a constant underflow solids concentration using a 3-in. hydrocyclone. Note how the median separation size increases rapidly with plastic viscosity from an initial 20 micron cut at PV=6 cp to 50 microns at PV=24 cp.
Figure 6.3
Sensitivity to Plastic Viscosity. Hydrocyclone performance declines with increasing plastic viscosity.
3) Feed Head
Feed head, or feed pressure, affects hydrocyclone performance as shown in Figure 6.4. Insufficient head reduces fluid velocity within the cone and adversely affects separation efficiency. Excessive head will cause premature wear and increased maintenance cost. Head is related to pressure and fluid density by the hydrostatic pressure equation: P = 0.052 H mud where P is the feed pressure in psi, 0.052 is a gravitational constant, H is the head in ft, and mud is the fluid density in lb/gal.
6.5
Solids Control Manual Since most hydrocyclones require 75 ft of head, the required pressure for a given mud density can be approximated by: P 4 mud Specific head requirements for most hydrocyclones are provided in Appendix E, Equipment Specifications. A centrifugal pump is used to feed the hydrocyclones because it provides a relatively constant head at a given flow rate. However, correct sizing of the pump is critical to ensure that sufficient head is available at the desired flow rate. Refer to the section on centrifugal pumps for a more detailed discussion on sizing and selecting centrifugal pumps for this application.
Figure 6.4
Sensitivity to Feed Head. This example, for a 3-in. cone, illustrates the importance of maintaining sufficient feed head.
4) Underflow Diameter
As underflow diameter is reduced, fewer solids will have sufficient mass (and momentum) to be discharged. The discharge will be dryer at the expense of separation efficiency. The appearance of the discharge gives a good indication of cone performance.
6.6
Hydrocyclones
Spray Discharge
A normally-operating cone should have an umbrella-shaped discharge of liquid and solids. The solids spiralling downward and out the cone bottom with their associated liquid are said to be in spray discharge. The inside stream moving up toward the overflow at high velocity will pull air with it in the vortex. This causes a slight vacuum to occur in the very center of the cone. The air is replaced by air drawn up through the center of the underflow opening as shown in Figure 6.1. Therefore, the presence of spray discharge and a slight vacuum in the center of the underflow opening is a good indication of a properly operating hydrocyclone.
Rope Discharge
If the solids concentration is high, there may not be room for all of the downward moving solids to exit the underflow. This causes an undesirable condition known as rope discharge so-called because of the shape of the underflow stream (Figure 6.5). In rope flow, the solids back up near the exit and decelerate. The underflow density is very high, since the liquid volume is severely reduced and only the largest particles will exit the cone. Exit velocities are low; the solids will appear to be falling out of the underflow nozzle. Many of the solids will not be able to exit the cone and will return with the liquid in the overflow. High cone wear will occur in the lower region of the cone. Corrective action consists of opening up the underflow and making sure the opening is clear. If the problem still occurs, this is an indication that the solids loading needs to be reduced by adding more hydrocyclones. If the problem is with the desilter, ensure that the desander is operating and that the shakers are running the finest screens possible.
Desanders
With the improved fine screening capability of shale shakers, the need for desanders has diminished. The primary role of the desander should be to reduce solids loading to the desilter cones in unweighted water-based muds. Desanders are recommended when the shakers are unable to screen down to 100 microns (140 mesh U.S. Sieve), or when large hole diameters are drilled at 100 ft/hr or faster. Considering that 75 microns is probably the best performance that can be expected from a desander cone, one might conclude they would have an application in weighted muds as well. This is generally not the case. Hydrocyclones sep-
6.7
Figure 6.5
Rope Flow Operation Characteristics. This condition should be avoided; try increasing the underflow opening size.
6.8
Hydrocyclones arate solids based on their mass and the density difference between the solid particles and the fluid. Since barite's specific gravity is substantially higher than drilled solids, it will tend to be preferentially removed by hydrocyclones. Also, as shown in Figure 6.3, the higher plastic viscosities normally associated with weighted muds will greatly reduce the desander's efficiency. Desander underflows are normally quite dry and abrasive and should be discarded directly. When processing expensive muds, the underflow may be routed to a centrifuge to recover the liquid, provided the solids are not abrasive and the underflow is diluted with whole mud before centrifuging. Another option is to screen the desander underflow down to 200 mesh (74 microns) to remove the larger, abrasive solids before processing with the centrifuge.
Recommended Desanders
Ten inch diameter desander cones are recommended. They provide the best combination of separation and capacity. The larger 12-in. cones usually cannot make a fine enough cut to be economic. Smaller cones are limited in flowrate and may deteriorate more quickly in abrasive conditions.
Desilters
Desilters should be used on all unweighted, water-based muds. They are not recommended for use on weighted muds since barite will be lost. When using expensive muds, process the desilter underflow with a centrifuge. A 3-in. hydrocyclone has been developoed which is up to 50% more efficient than some existing oilfield desilters. Figure 6.6 shows the improvement in performance over a typical 50 gpm, 4-in. cone. The 3-in. cone is not a balanced cone; it will discharge fluid even when no solids are present. In many cases, this cone's underflow should be processed by a centrifuge. The economics of centrifuging the underflow should be checked using the SECOP program. Estimated discard rates per cone are plotted as a function of underflow diameter in Figure 6.7. Size the centrifuge for the calculated underflow rate. Run the cones intermittently on unweighted mud when no centrifuge is available. Since the underflow opening of the 3-in. cone is smaller than a typical 4-in. cone, it is more susceptible to plugging. Ensure that all of the mud is fine-screened or run an efficient, properly installed desander ahead of the 3-in. cones. Desilters can also be used in certain weighted mud applications to reduce the barite loading to the centrifuge thereby improving its efficiency in barite recovery mode (see Chapter 8, Centrifuges). Here, the underflow of the desilter cones are
6.9
Figure 6.6
Near Optimum Core Efficiency. The 50 gpm 3-in. cone exhibits greatly improved performance over a typical 4-in. cone at the same flowrate.
Figure 6.7
Estimated Discard Rates. Use this chart to estimate underflow rates from the 3-in. cone.
6.10
Hydrocyclones returned to the active system and the overflow is fed to the Barite Recovery centrifuge. The upper limit for this application is generally limited to mud densities of 15 ppg or less due to viscosity and solids content limitations or cone performance. Use only enough 3-in. hydrocyclones to match the feed rate to the centrifuge. Blank off the remaining cones. Use the largest underflow nozzle diameter available to prevent plugging or rope flow.
Recommended Desilters
MPE 3 in. (15 Cone) MPE 3 in. (10 Cone) These cones are recommended because of their superior performance. They will provide the separation performance of a 2-in. cone at the flowrate of a typical 4-in. cone.
Sizing Hydrocyclone Manifolds

For properly routed hydrocyclones, the minimum number required can be estimated by: Maximum Circulation Rate 1.1 No . of Cones Required = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Single Cone Flow Rate This equation does not consider solids loading. If penetration rates in excess of 100 ft/hr are anticipated, the number of cones should be increased. Specific head requirements and flow capacities for each cone are listed in Appendix E, Equipment Specifications. Table 6.2 may be used to estimate the flow capacity of each cone operating at 75 ft of head. Hydrocyclones are normally provided in banks of 8, 10, 12 and 16 cones per manifold (Figure 6.8). Increase the required number of cones to one of these standard manifold sizes.
1. Operate enough hydrocyclones to process over 100% of the circulation rate or to handle the maximum solids loading rate. 2. The hydrocyclone overflow should be discharged to a compartment downstream from the feed compartment. Use bottom equalization between compartments.
6.11
Figure 6.8
Typical Hydrocyclone Manifold. This is an inline manifold. Circular manifolds are also common.
3. Mechanically stir all hydrocyclone removal and discharge compartments to ensure uniform feed. Mud guns should not be used because they can reduce hydrocyclone efficiency by bypassing a portion of the mud. 4. Do not allow cones to operate with plugged apexes or inlets. 5. Spray discharge at the cone underflow is desired. Rope flow will cause premature wear and is less efficient. Rope flow indicates that either more hydrocyclones or finer shaker screens are required or that the underflow apex size is too small. 6. Because 2-in. cones are extremely susceptible to plugging, consider using the 3-in. cone instead. It has twice the capacity and equivalent performance. 7. Do not bypass the shale shaker or operate with torn screens. 8. The hydrocyclone manifold should be located above the mud level in the active system to prevent accidental loss of mud by siphoning when the cones are not operating.
6.12
Hydrocyclones 9. Replace flanged-type hydrocyclones with the quick-connect type to improve servicing time. 10. Replace worn, malfunctioning cones immediately. If no spares are available, remove the cone and blank off the feed and outlet lines. 11. Have a working pressure or head gauge on the manifold feed inlet. 12. Install a siphon breaker on the overflow manifold exit. 13. Size suction and discharge piping to provide flow velocities in the range of 5-10 ft/sec. Refer to Chapter 9, Centrifugal Pumps & Piping. 14. Use one centrifugal pump per hydrocyclone manifold.
Troubleshooting
Symptoms
One or more cones are not discharging - others OK. Some cones losing whole mud in a stream. High mud loss, conical shape in some cones others normal. Repeated plugging of apexes. High mud loss, all cones, weak stream, conical shape. Cones at discharge end discharge poorly with a dryer stream. Cone discharge is unsteady, varying feed head. Motor protection fuses blow.
Probable Causes
Plugged at feed inlet or outlet - remove cone and clean out lines. Backflow from overflow manifold, plugged cone inlet. Low inlet velocity due to partially plugged inlet or cone body. Too small underflow opening, bypassed shaker or torn screens. Low feed head-check obstruction, pump size and rpm, partially-closed valve, solids settling in feed line, frozen lines. Strong vacuum in manifold discharge line, usually occurs with long drop into pits - install antisiphon tube. Air or gas in feed, too small feed lines, air from upstream equipment discharge. Required input horsepower is higher than rated horsepower of motor - check for tees bypassing mud, additional equipment, manifolding. Cavitation in the pump - flow rate is too high - need larger lines. Suction line blockage - check for obstructions. Solids removal is insufficient, solids may be too fine to remove, insufficient cones to match drilling rate - add cones.
Low impeller life.
Mud percent solids continues to increase.
6.13
Symptoms
Cones are discharging a heavy, slow-moving stream. High mud losses. Aerated mud downstream of hydrocyclone overflow return.
Probable Causes
Cones are overloaded - use larger apex size, insufficient cones to match drilling rate - add more cones. Cone opening is too large - reduce size or consider centrifuging underflows. Viscous mud, return line ends above fluid level in tank - route hydrocyclone overflow into trough to allow air to break out.
6.14
Hydrocyclones
Summary
Hydrocyclones separate solids from fluid by using centrifugal force to cause solids to be settled from the fluid. There are no moving parts. Centrifugal force is created by the conversion of centrifugal pump head into a high velocity stream spiraling within the cone. Solids concentrate in proportion to their mass near the wall of the cone and are discharged at the bottom of the cone in the underflow. Clean fluid and fine solids are returned through the top of the cone in the overflow. Cone diameter, cone angle, underflow diameter, feed head, and plastic viscosity have the largest effect on hydrocyclone performance. Hydrocyclones will produce a relatively wet discharge compared to shale shakers and centrifuges. Underflow density is not a good indicator of cone performance. Finer solids will have more associated liquid and the resultant density will be lower than with coarse solids. Provide enough hydrocyclones to process at least 110% of the circulation rate, more if high penetration rates are expected. Use desanders in unweighted mud when the shakers are unable to screen down to 140 mesh (100 microns). The role of the desander is to reduce solids loading to the downstream desilter. Ten inch diameter desander cones are recommended; they provide the best combination of separation and flow capacity. Use desilters on all unweighted, water-based muds. The recommended 3-in. cone is up to 50% more efficient than typical 4-in. cones. This cone is an unbalanced design and will discharge a very wet underflow. Process the underflow with a centrifuge to recover fluid, if the economics warrant. Installation and operating guidelines, along with a troubleshooting guide are included in this chapter.
6.15
6.16
Chapter 7. Mud Cleaners
A mud cleaner is a bank of hydrocyclones mounted over a vibrating screen (Figure 7.1). Free liquid and particles smaller than the screen openings are returned to the circulating system. Solids removed by the screen are discarded. Screen sizes between 100 mesh and 325 mesh are commonly available. Mud cleaners were originally developed for use in weighted muds to remove drilled solids down to the size of barite (< 74 microns) when shakers could only run 100 mesh (149 microns) screens at best. However, with the fine-screening capability of todays linear motion shakers, the applications for mud cleaners are limited.
Figure 7.1
Mudcleaner Combines Hydrocyclone and Shale Shaker. The hydrocyclone underflow is screened to remove solids.
7.1
Solids Control Manual Where possible, the installation of sufficient fine screen shakers is recommended for weighted muds in lieu of a mud cleaner. Shakers equipped with fine-mesh screens guarantee that all of the circulation rate is processed, whereas mud cleaners may treat only a portion of the circulation rate. Shakers are more dependable and their screens typically last longer. Barite losses measured over mud cleaner screens are higher than losses over shaker screens at the same mesh size. This is due to the high viscosity of the cone underflow and the relatively small screening area of most mud cleaners. Drexel-Brandt and Derrick, among others, have addressed this by mounting desilter cones over a full-size shaker deck (Figure 7.2). Derrick uses a specially-designed High-G shaker which they claim also improves cuttings dryness. Regardless, overall system efficiency would be better served by an additional shaker at the flowline rather than a mud cleaner in most cases.
Figure 7.2
Brandt ATL 2800 Mud Cleaner. This design mounts 28 4-inch cones over a standard ATL shaker basket.
7.2
Mud Cleaners Mud cleaners continue to be a popular solids removal device within the industry and will be encountered on many rigs. If economics or space constraints do not justify the installation of additional shakers on an existing solids removal system, the mud cleaner, when routed and operated correctly, can be used to advantage in both unweighted and weighted muds. Refer to the system arrangements section for proper fluid routing and mud cleaner placement.
1. Since the mud cleaner is both a hydrocyclone and a shaker, many of the operating guidelines listed for these devices apply to mud cleaners. 2. A decrease in solids coming off the screen may indicate a torn screen which should be replaced as soon as possible. 3. Plugged cones or large solids coming off the screen can imply a problem with the upstream shale shakers. The likely causes are bypassed screens, torn screens or dumping the shaker box into the active system. 4. The desilter cones on the mud cleaner should be 6 in. diameter or smaller. The median cuts of larger cones are too coarse to be useful.
Unweighted Muds
1. In unweighted muds, the mud cleaner should be used as a desilter by blanking off the screen and discharging the underflow directly. 2. Because the mud cleaner is operated as a desilter, it must be run in parallel with other desilters (same suction and discharge compartments). As with desilters, the suction should be from the desander discharge compartment and the overflow discharged to a downstream compartment. 3. If the hydrocyclone underflow is to be processed by a centrifuge, the screens may be used to reduce solids loading to the centrifuge. Run the finest screens possible. 4. In closed-loop systems, route the desanders underflow onto the mud cleaner screens to help dry the discharge. Note, however, that the mud passing through the screen should be processed by a centrifuge. 5. The hydrocyclones on the mud cleaner should be run as wet as possible to improve solids removal efficiency.
7.3
Weighted Muds
1. Use the mud cleaners when 150 mesh (100 micron) screens cannot be run on the shale shakers. 2. At higher mud weights, the screen may become overloaded with solids. If the screen overloads, remove enough cones to keep it from discharging excess fluid. 3. Monitor the composition and rate of losses over the screens, especially in oil-based muds. Use the same procedure as outlined in the shaker section. 4. For water-based muds, dilution water added at the mud cleaner screen may reduce barite losses by reducing the viscosity of the hydrocyclone underflow. However, the amount of drilled solids discarded may also be reduced.
Summary

A mud cleaner is a desilter mounted over a vibrating screen. The desilter underflow is screened. Fluid and solids finer than the screen are returned to the active system. Only solids coarser than the screen openings are removed. Mud cleaners were originally designed for use in weighted muds when shakers were incapable of screening down to the size of the weighting material. With todays fine screen shakers, the applications for mud cleaners are limited. Fine screen shakers are recommended in lieu of mud cleaners: Screen life is better, all of the circulation rate is processed, and barite losses are reported to be lower. In unweighted mud, the mud cleaner should be used as a desilter. Screening the underflow is unnecessary unless the mud cleaner is used to screen abrasive solids that will be processed by a centrifuge. Use the mud cleaner on existing solids control systems, when 150 mesh (100 microns) screens cannot be run on the shakers in weighted mud.
7.4
Chapter 8. Decanting Centrifuges
Since their introduction to the oilfield in the early 1950s, decanting centrifuges have become an increasingly common addition to the solids control system. Centrifuges are capable of removing very fine solids that cannot be removed by any other mechanical separation device. In unweighted muds, the centrifuge can greatly improve the separation efficiency of the solids removal system and reduce liquid discharge volumes when used in conjunction with hydrocyclones. Increasingly stringent environmental restrictions on drilling waste discharge and the incentive of reduced dilution and disposal volumes have made the use of centrifuges economically attractive in many instances. In weighted muds, the centrifuge is used to reclaim barite while removing colloidal solids which can cause high mud viscosity, poor filtercake properties, and decreased penetration rates. The centrifuge is the primary separation device used in a chemically-enhanced dewatering system to reduce liquid discharge volumes. Unlike other solids removal devices, decanting centrifuges are usually leased from service companies. Very few rigs come equipped with centrifuges because they are relatively expensive to purchase and require specialized maintenance. A typical oilfield-ready centrifuge may cost $80-$150 thousand, depending upon size, performance and design features. Lease rates range from $150 to $300 per day. It is therefore important to understand the factors affecting centrifuge performance to economically justify the specific application and to achieve maximum performance.
The major components of a decanting centrifuge are shown in Figure 8.1. Decanting centrifuges separate solids from liquid by imparting high centrifugal forces on the solid-liquid slurry fed into a bowl rotating at high speed. The feed stream is pumped into the center of the bowl via a feed tube. The slurry exits the feed tube and enters an acceleration chamber housed inside the conveyor. It exits the chamber through feed ports and enters the bowl area. Here, the slurry is exposed to a high G-force created by the bowls rotation. The high G-force causes sedimentation of the feed stream solids. The rotating conveyor has flights similar to threads on a screw which auger the settled solids up the conical section of the bowl and out of the liquid pool. The gear box causes the conveyor to rotate at a slightly slower speed than the bowl. The torque needed to turn the conveyor is carried through the gear box and emerges at a shaft. This shaft is held by a shear pin or other safety device so that excess torque will not be applied to the gearbox or conveyor. The relatively dry solids continue out of the bowl. The cleaned liquid is decanted off through ports at the opposite end (Figure 8.2).
8.1
Figure 8.1
Centrifuge Components. These components are common to most decanting centrifuges used in oilfield applications.
Figure 8.2
Centrifuge Operation. The conveyor augers solids up the conical section of the bowl and out of the liquid pool.
8.2
Decanting Centrifuges
Performance Parameters
The effect of various design and feed parameters on centrifuge performance has been evaluated. The results of this study are summarized to assist in the selection and operation of centrifuges. Since many centrifuge parameters are related, one aspect of performance cannot be discussed singularly without implicating others. However, in general, centrifuge performance is affected by the following parameters in decreasing order of importance:
1) G-Force
According to Stokes Law, particle settling velocity is proportional to G-force: aD p ( s L ) ( 10 ) V T = -------------------------------------------------116 where: VT a = = Particle terminal velocity, in./sec Bowl acceleration, in./sec2 = .0054812 x Bowl Diameter x RPM2 (1 g = 386 in./sec2) Particle diameter, microns Solids Density, gm/cm3 Feed Slurry Density, gm/cm3 Feed Slurry Viscosity, (centipoise = gm/100 cm sec)
2 6
Dp S L
= = = =
Since G-force increases with the square of bowl RPM, it is an important parameter. G-force also increases linearly with bowl diameter. Figure 8.3 shows how solids removal efficiency improves with increasing G-force. For a given particle size and fluid properties, there is a minimum G-force necessary to invoke settling. Although high G-force is desirable, the cost is proportional to the cube of the bowl rpm and there are similar economic limitations on bowl diameter as well. Thus, the required G-force must be obtained from a practical combination of speed and diameter. Most oilfield centrifuges have bowl dimensions from 14 to 28 in. in diameter and lengths from 30 to 55 in. Rotational speeds range from 1000 rpm to 4000 rpm, depending on the application. The more expensive, high-G machines can provide up to 3,000 Gs. The specifications for each centrifuge are listed in Appendix E, Equipment Specifications. Note, however, that increasing G-force eventually reduces solids conveyance capacity due to torque limitations. As G-forces increase, more solids are settled in the bowl and they adhere more tightly. More conveyor torque is required to move
8.3
Solids Control Manual the solids out. Once the torque limitations of the machine are reached, conveyance ceases.
Figure 8.3
Effect of G-Force on Separation. Higher Gs improve separation performance.
2) Viscosity
From Stokes Law, particle settling velocity is inversely proportional to fluid viscosity. Figure 8.4 illustrates the beneficial effects of a feed mud with a low yield value. This shows the merit of diluting the centrifuge feed to improve performance. It also helps explain the relatively poor performance of centrifuges when processing polymer fluids with characteristically high viscosities at low shear rates.
3) Cake Dryness
Discharge dryness is commonly considered a direct indication of centrifuge performance. However, test results have shown that cake dryness is more correctly a function of particle size and, therefore, is inversely related to separation efficiency. Test points which yielded the driest solids corresponded to the lowest efficiency and coarsest D50 separation. As shown in Figure 8.5, solids dryness occurs at a threshold G-force level. Subsequent increases in G-force do not remove additional liquid. Length of the dry beach within the centrifuge bowl (a function of pond depth) also has little effect on dryness. Dry beach length refers to the distance
8.4
Figure 8.4
Effect of Viscosity on Separation Performance. Higher yield values degrade centrifuge separation performance.
Figure 8.5
Effect of G-Force on Cuttings Dryness. Above a certain threshold G-force, cuttings dryness does not improve.
8.5
Solids Control Manual from the solids discharge ports to the surface of the fluid pond within the centrifuge bowl. But, the small difference in dryness made a significant difference in the appearance of the solids. At 71% by weight, the solids were quite runny and at 76% by weight, the solids seemed much more stackable.
4) Pond Depth and Processing Capacity

Pond depth controls both fluid residence time and dry beach length. Test data confirms that increased pond depth residence time increases separation. However, increased pond depth reduces centrifuge flow capacity. Maximum flow capacity is controlled by the height of the cake discharge port. When the fluid depth in the centrifuge bowl reaches this height, drilling fluid flows out along with the discarded cake. The flowrate at which liquid spills out the cake discharge port is called the flood-out point. Since one objective of centrifuging is to limit liquid waste, it is obviously not advantageous to run the centrifuge at a flow rate beyond the flood-out point. Flooding is controlled by a combination of pond depth and flowrate. The pond depth is set mechanically by an adjustable weir. The flowrate increases pond height according to the viscous drag forces which increase the fluid head required to drive the liquid through the centrifuge. The head height is added to the fixed pond depth to give a total depth of fluid in the bowl. For example, consider a centrifuge with a maximum fluid depth of 3 in. before flood-out (closed fluid exit ports). If 300 gpm is the maximum flow rate at floodout with a 1-in. pond depth setting, this means 2 in. of fluid head was developed. If the pond depth setting is adjusted to 2 in., then only 1 in. of fluid head is available before the 3-in. flood-out point is reached. Obviously, the maximum flowrate for this pond depth setting will have to be much less than 300 gpm. Maximum flow capacity is achieved when the shallowest pond depth is used at the expense of separation efficiency. Conversely, deep ponds maximize separation efficiency at the cost of flowrate capacity. The best combination is determined by the coarseness of the solids to be separated. Figure 8.6 illustrates how, for a fine solids size distribution, a deep pond depth at lower flow rates can produce almost the same cake rate as a shallow pond depth at higher flow rates. This is due to the improved separation efficiency of the deep pond case. Figure 8.7 shows how, for coarse solids, the higher flow capacity of the shallow pond produces more solids removal than the deep pond case. The results suggest that, for coarse particle size distributions as encountered in top hole drilling, shallow pond depths are advantageous, whereas deep ponds should be used for all other applications.
8.6
Figure 8.6
Effect of Pond Depth on Fine Solids Removal. Deeper ponds are more efficient than shallow ponds when the solids are very fine.
Figure 8.7
Effect of Pond Depth on Coarse Solids Removal. Shallow pond depths are preferred for coarse solids distributions.
8.7
5) Bowl - Conveyor Differential RPM And Torque

Differential RPM is the difference between the bowl RPM and the conveyor RPM. The differential is provided by the gearbox which transmits power from the bowl to the conveyor. Differential RPM is simply calculated by dividing the bowl RPM by the gearbox ratio. Many centrifuge manufacturers provide a backdrive which can independently alter the RPM. Backdrive units are, in effect, hydraulic gear reduction systems used to vary the speed of the conveyor relative to the bowl. On backdrive units, RPM depends upon the rotation of the gearbox pinion and the orientation of the flights on the conveyor. For these units, RPM may be calculated by:
RPM = (Bowl RPM - Pinion Speed)/Gearbox ratio. RPM is important because it determines the velocity at which solids are conveyed through the centrifuge. For example, a RPM of 50 and a flight pitch of 3-in. yields a conveyance velocity of 150 in./min. Another expression takes the flight pitch and number of leads on the conveyor into account to describe the surface area of the bowl swept by the conveyor flights per unit time. The faster the rate at which the area is swept, the greater the solids capacity.
As = 2 rcyl x RPM x SN where: As rcyl S N = = = = swept area/unit time cylindrical bowl radius flight pitch number of leads on the conveyor
This equation suggests that solids capacity can be increased by increasing the RPM (lowering the gearbox ratio). Low swept area values could indicate potential torque problems. For example, centrifuges with 130:1 or higher gearbox ratios and centrifuges with 80:1 gearbox ratios with single-lead conveyors may be limited in flowrate by torque. Test data indicates that increasing RPM reduces torque. Also, torque increases as feed median particle size increases. Despite the common belief that high RPM values agitate the pond and inhibit sedimentation, test results indicate that the effect of RPM on solids removal efficiency is slight, provided sufficient differential exists to remove the solids.
8.8
Centrifuging Unweighted Mud

Centrifuging unweighted muds provides two major benefits: 1) The removal of drilled solids that are too fine to be removed by any other solids removal device, and 2) a relatively dry discharge. Although the centrifuge cannot remove ultrafine, colloidal solids, it is important to remove the fine solids before they degrade into these submicron particles. As a rule, at least 25% of the circulating rate should be centrifuged. It is usually uneconomic (and logistically unfeasible) to process the entire circulating rate. Regardless, the benefits of centrifuging to remove fine solids cannot be understated. High-G, high capacity centrifuges are recommended to maximize separation performance. Refer to the discussion on centrifuge selection, appearing later in this chapter. Since separation efficiency varies inversely with feed rate and residence time, the optimum feed rate is not necessarily the highest possible rate. Rather, it is the combination of pond depth and feed rate that produces the highest solids discharge rate. The maximum efficient processing rate for a large oilfield centrifuge will seldom exceed 250 gpm, even for relatively coarse drilled solids and low fluid viscosities. If the particle size distribution is very fine, more solids may be removed with a lower feed rate and deeper pond depths.
Centrifuging Hydrocyclone Underflow

When liquid discharge must be strictly controlled due to high mud cost, high liquid disposal cost or limited reserve pit capacity, the centrifuge should process the underflow of the desilter cones. In this configuration, the hydrocyclones are used to concentrate solids to the centrifuge which then separates the drill cuttings from the free liquid and colloidal solids. System performance can be improved by opening the cone apexes to discharge more liquid. This improves the separation efficiency of the cones and produces a less viscous slurry at the underflow. Figure 8.8 gives an example of how centrifuging desilter underflow becomes economic with increasing mud cost and desilter underflow rates. Enough centrifuge capacity must be available to process slightly more than the cone underflow rate. Additional makeup volume should be provided from the active system downstream of the hydrocyclone feed. Because the hydrocyclone underflow must be segregated from the active system, a separate centrifuge feed compartment is required. Figure 8.9 and Figure 8.10 illustrate two designs for the centrifuge feed compartment. The compartment should be small (<50 bbls) to prevent solids settling. Both high and low equalization should be provided. The low equalizer supplies makeup volume from the active system during normal processing. A valve (normally open) should be installed on the low equalizer. This valve may be used to check that the centrifuge
8.9
Solids Control Manual feed rate exceeds the cone underflow rate. If the centrifuge is to be used in weighted mud to process the centrate of the barite recovery centrifuge, the valve should be closed to isolate the feed compartment. The high equalizer is provided to prevent accidental overflow.
Figure 8.8
Economics of Centrifuging Hydrocyclone Underflow. Substantial savings are possible by recovering the liquid from cone underflows.
Operating Guidelines, Centrifuging Unweighted Mud

1. When processing the active system, the centrifuge feed should be taken from the desilter discharge compartment or downstream. The centrate should be returned to next downstream compartment.
8.10
Figure 8.9
Fluid Routing to Centrifuge Hydrocyclone Underflows. The desilter underflow is segregated from the active system for processing by the centrifuge.
2. Provide enough centrifuges to process at least 25% of the circulation rate. Large, high-G units are usually required. 3. Run at maximum bowl RPM to achieve highest G-force and best separation. 4. Operate the centrifuge just below the flood-out point. 5. The best feed rate and pond depth will depend on the size distribution of the drilled solids. Use shallow ponds and high feed rates when coarse solids predominate. Conversely, deeper ponds and lower feed rates are more efficient when fine drilled solids are to be removed. Field experimentation is necessary to optimize centrifuge setup. 6. Always wash out the centrifuge on shutdown. 7. If the centrifuge is to used on both unweighted and weighted muds, rig up to allow either option. Both the centrate and solids streams should be rigged up to allow each to be discarded or returned to the active system. 8. The solids discharge chute should be angled at greater than 45 to prevent solids buildup. If this is not possible, a wash line may be necessary to assist in moving the solids. On land-based operations, use the reserve pit as a source for wash fluid. Do not create unnecessary reserve pit volume by using rig water.
8.11
Figure 8.10
Internal Centrifuge Feed Compartment Design. The dense desilter underflow will displace the lighter active system mud from the centrifuge feed compartment.
Centrifuging Weighted Muds

The centrifuge is used in weighted mud applications to recover valuable weighting material from mud which must be discharged due to unacceptable colloidal solids content. The centrifuge settles out barite and coarse drilled solids which are returned to the active mud system to maintain density. The relatively clean centrate containing liquid and colloidal solids is discarded. These colloidal solids cause many drilling fluid problems, such as high surge/swab pressures and ECDs, differential sticking, and high chemical costs. Usually, the value of the weighting agent in these mud systems makes it economic to recover the weighting agent from the whole mud before it is discarded. Figure 8.11 gives an example of the economics of centrifuging weighted muds. Ideally, the barite recovery process should remove only colloidal solids without losing the larger particle sizes used as weighting material. Discarding potentially reusable barite increases barite use and drilling fluid cost. Barite losses can be
8.12
Figure 8.11
Choice of Drilled Solids Removal from Weighted Mud. This example shows the economic advantage of recovering barite.
reduced when the centrifuge makes the maximum liquid/solids separation. As discussed in the previous section, this means operating the centrifuge at high G-force. Figure 8.12 shows the effect of G-force on the amount of barite discarded in the centrate. At 20 gpm, the difference in barite losses is 4.58 lb/min. Based on 10 hours per day centrifuging and barite cost of $6.50 per 100 lb, high G-force centrifuging should save $175 per day. Centrifuges are usually torque-limited in weighted muds due to the high solids content. Typically, torque is reduced by slowing bowl RPM. This reduces G-force and RPM, resulting in less effective liquid/solids separation and the likelihood of increased torque from reduced solids conveyance.
8.13
Figure 8.12
Benefits of Increased G-Force on Barite Recovery. Less barite is lost in the centrifuge centrate with increased G-force.
Operating Guidelines, Barite Recovery Mode

1. The following procedures are recommended to reduce torque when operating centrifuges in barite recovery mode to maximize liquid/solids separation: A. For a given flowrate, increase the pond depth until the recovered solids become runny. Buoyant force reduces the torque needed to convey solids out of the centrifuge. A shallow pond creates a long beach section. Once the solids exit the pool, the extra energy required to convey these solids results in higher torque. B. Process weighted mud continuously at a reduced feed rate rather than intermittently at higher feed rates. This reduces solids loads and results in less torque. It also increases residence time which will result in finer separation. C. At higher mud weights, use hydrocyclones to reduce the solids loading in the feed mud to the centrifuge. The cone underflow is returned to the active system. The overflow, containing fewer solids, is fed to the centri8.14
fuge. Since solids concentration is reduced, torque from conveying settled solids is reduced and permits higher G-force centrifuging. 2. Provide sufficient centrifuge capacity to process 5-15% of the rig circulation rate. Centrifuge capacity is reduced in weighted mud; the 25% target recommended for unweighted mud is usually difficult to attain in weighted mud. 3. Add as much dilution water as possible to the centrifuge feed to reduce the mud viscosity and improve centrifuge separation performance. 4. Return the solids to a well-agitated compartment upstream of the suction and mixing tanks. 5. Use a high weir between the barite return compartment and the next downstream compartment to keep the fluid level high. This will promote better mixing. 6. Always wash out the centrifuge on shutdown. 7. Routinely check the centrifuge performance by measuring the flow rate and solids composition of the cake and centrate.
Two-Stage Centrifuging
Two-stage centrifuging is used in weighted muds when the liquid phase cannot be discarded for economic or environmental reasons. The most frequent application is in weighted, oil-based muds where the expensive liquid phase cannot be discarded. The first centrifuge recovers weighting material from the weighted mud as discussed in the previous section on single-stage centrifuging for barite recovery. The centrate, instead of being discarded, is fed to a second centrifuge operating at higher G-force. This centrifuge is used to discard the solids and return the cleaned liquid phase into the active mud system (Figure 8.13). For two-stage centrifuging to be efficient, the first centrifuge must make a good separation since most of the solids in its centrate will be discarded. The poorer the separation, the more barite which will be carried over in the centrate and discarded by the second centrifuge. Similarly, the second centrifuge must operate at the highest possible G-force to remove the most solids. Pond depths should also be deepened to just under the flood-out point for the best separation efficiency. Economics of two-stage centrifuging are site-dependent. Variables such as time, drilling fluid, buy-back agreements, and well plans contribute to the overall economics. Field experience has been mixed on the cost-effectiveness. As a rough rule of thumb, oil-based muds with barite concentrations greater than 4 lb/gal (i.e., 12 ppg mud) are usually candidates for two-stage centrifuging. Below this concentration, centrifuging to strip all solids including barite may be more eco-
8.15
Figure 8.13
Two Stage Centrifuging. The first centrifuge recovers barite; the second centrifuge dries its centrate and recovers valuable fluid.
nomical, especially at lower mud weights. At intermediate mud weights, dump and dilute may be a viable option depending upon the conditions of the buy-back agreement. Dump and dilute in this case means transferring mud laden with low gravity solids from the active system to storage tanks for return to the mud company. Clean whole mud is used to replace the dumped mud in the active system. Another option is to do nothing except screen the mud and dilute when possible to maintain mud properties. The decision to employ this alternative should be made judiciously. It is usually better to err on the side of caution. Over time, low gravity solids will become a large percentage of the weighting material. Filtercake thickness, mud viscosity, and material consumption also may increase. However, this may be the least expensive alternative when drilling time is short and hole sizes are small. Oil-based muds are quite solids-tolerant and can withstand some buildup of low-gravity solids. This option is not generally recommended for water-based fluids.
Field Evaluation of Two-Stage Centrifuging Economics

An evaluation of two-stage centrifuging economics can be made in the field. This method computes the total centrifuging cost (including rental cost and the value of the mud and barite discarded). This cost is compared to the value of the whole
8.16
Decanting Centrifuges mud that must be discarded to remove an equivalent amount of low gravity solids. The following data is required: Active System Mud Density, m (ppg) Barite Concentration, HGS (lb/bbl)* Low Gravity Solids Concentration, LGS (lb/bbl)* Sludge Density, dis (ppg) Operating Time, t (hrs) Centrifuge Discard Rate, Qcen (lb/hr)* Barite Concentration, HGSdis (lb/bbl)* Low Gravity Solids Concentration, LGSdis (lb/bbl) Barite Unit Cost, Cb ($/sack) Liquid Mud Cost, Clm ($/bbl) Centrifuge Rental Cost, Ccen ($/day)
Centrifuge Discard
Costs
*Barite and Low Gravity Solids concentrations in lb/bbl of whole mud are determined from retort analysis and must be corrected for salt content.
Calculations
Two-Stage Centrifuging Cost 1. Mass Flow Rate of Drilled Solids, (lb/hr): Mds = Qdis x LGSdis 2. Mass Flow Rate of Barite, (lb/hr): Mbar = Qdis x HGSdis 3. Mud Discard Rate, (bbl/hr): Qliq = Qdis - Mds/928 - Mbar/1471 4. Value of Discarded Barite, ($/hr): $/hr(bar) = Mbar x Cb/100 5. Value of Discarded Liquid Mud, ($/hr): $/hr(mud) = Qliq x Clm 6. Total Two-Stage Centrifuging Cost, ($/hr), ($/day): $/hr = Ccen/24 + (4) + (5) *$/day = Ccen + t ((4) + (5))
8.17
Solids Control Manual * Disposal/treatment cost of the centrifuge discard should be added to the Total Cost, if applicable. Use Qcen for total hourly sludge rate. Equivalent Whole Mud Disposal Cost 7. Whole Mud Discard Rate, (bbl/hr): Qmud = Mds/LGS 8. Mass Flow Rate of Barite Losses, (lb/hr): Mbar(m) = Qmud * HGS 9. Liquid Mud Losses, (lb/hr): Qliq(m) = Qmud - Mds/928 - Mbar(m)/1471 10. Barite Cost, ($/hr): $/hr(bar) = Mbar(m) x $/sack x 1/100 11. Liquid Mud Cost, ($/hr): $/hr(liq) = Qliq(m) * $/bbl 12. Hourly Cost of Discarded Mud, ($/hr): $/hr = (10) + (11) 13. *Daily Cost of Discarded Mud, ($/day): $/day = t x (13) *If using oil-based mud, the buy-back value of the discarded mud should be subtracted from the daily disposal cost.
Centrifuge Selection
Generally, the following features on a centrifuge are highly recommended: 1. Accelerator for the feed to decrease turbulence. 2. Tungsten carbide feed port entries to prevent erosion. 3. Tungsten carbide tiles on the conveyor to improve wear resistance. 4. Universally adjustable pond dams to fine-tune centrifuge performance. 5. Stainless steel bowl and conveyor to reduce corrosion problems. 6. High G-force to ensure maximum separation performance.
8.18
Decanting Centrifuges Since centrifuges are normally leased, quality of service in the local area should be a primary consideration when selecting centrifuges. A centrifuge with all the features listed above will not be much use if it cannot be kept running because of poor maintenance. Contract length should also be considered. For example, hard-facing on the conveyor instead of tungsten carbide tiles, or a carbon steel bowl instead of stainless steel is entirely acceptable if the centrifuge is to be leased for a short term and maintenance costs are borne by the contractor. Conversely, when drilling in remote areas or under harsh conditions, the features listed above will help ensure continued trouble-free operation. Regardless, a full inspection should be performed before the centrifuge is accepted for lease. The coarseness of the solids can also influence centrifuge selection. As shown in Figure 8.14, when the solids distribution is fine, a small high G machine such as the Sharples 14 x 30 may remove more solids at a lower feed rate than a large bowl, low G machine such as the Bird 24 x 38. Conversely, the larger bowl machine will provide superior performance when the solids are coarse (Figure 8.15). Table 8.1 and Table 8.2 contain recommended common oilfield centrifuges. Table 8.1 lists centrifuges recommended for unweighted mud applications. Table 8.2 lists centrifuges recommended for weighted mud applications. These tables are provided as a guideline only. Centrifuges not listed in these tables may provide equivalent performance provided the performance criteria discussed previously are met. For example, Sharples builds larger centrifuges than the P3400. These larger centrifuges will provide superior performance, but very few are available for drilling application and are not listed here. Table 8.1 Recommended Centrifuges for Unweighted Mud Centrifuge
Hutcheson Hayes HH5500 Alpha-Laval 418 Swaco HS 518 Derrick DE1000 Drexel-Brandt HS3400 Sharples P3400 Oiltools S3.0 Sweco SC-4 Broadbent Derrick DB-1 Drexel-Brandt CF2
Bowl Size
16 in. x 55 in. 14 in. x 56 in. 14 in x 56 in. 14 in. x 50 in. 14 in. x 50 in. 14 in. x 50 in. 21 in. x 62 in. 24 in. x 40 in. 24 in. x 38 in. 24 in. x 40 in. 24 in. x 38 in.
Maximum Bowl RPM

3250 4000 3313 4000 3250 3250 1800 1950 1900 2000 1900
8.19
Figure 8.14
Centrifuge Performance Comparison on Fine Solids Distribution. The smaller 14 x 30 High G centrifuge is more efficient when solids are fine.
Figure 8.15
Centrifuge Performance Comparison on Coarse Solids Distribution. The high flow capacity of larger Low G machines is preferred in the presence of coarse solids.
8.20
Decanting Centrifuges Table 8.2 Recommended Centrifuges for Weighted Mud Centrifuge
Alpha-Laval 414 Swaco 414 Sweco SC-4 Broadbent Hutcheson Hayes HH1430 Oiltools S3.0s Sharples P3000 Sweco SC-2
Bowl Size
14 in. x 38 in. 14 in. x 38 in. 24 in. x 40 in. 24 in. x 38 in. 14 in. x 30 in. 18 in. x 56 in. 14 in. x 30 in. 18 in. x 30 in.
Equipment Descriptions
Hutcheson-Hayes HH5500 (16 X 55)
This machine has all of the recommended features including a high capacity gearbox to minimize gearbox failure. In most applications, it has more flow capacity and separating power than the other centrifuges listed. The 5500 can be run at 3250 RPM in unweighted muds and approximately 2600 RPM in weighted fluids. A variable speed controller on the main drive is recommended for dual purpose applications. Because it is a relatively new product, few HH5500s are currently available as rental units.
Alpha-Laval 418/Swaco HS 518 (14 X 56)

The Alpha-Laval 418 and the Swaco HS 518 have the same basic design, although the Alpha-Laval has a higher maximum bowl speed and should have more separating power than the slower Swaco unit. Plate type pond dams require total replacement for adjusting pond depth. Adjustment for three differential RPMs is provided. The flight spacing and 60:1 gearbox ratio give reasonable performance. The 418 and 518 are not recommended for barite recovery; the long bowl length is prone to developing high torque in weighted muds.
Derrick DE1000/Sharples P3400/Brandt HS3400 (14 X 50)

These Sharples-designed centrifuges have most of the desired design features and will provide superior performance in unweighted muds. Recently, Sharples was bought out by Alfa-Laval, who reportedly will discontinue production of the Sharples P3400 and P3000 in favor of their own 418 and 414 models. The long bowl is susceptible to developing high torque in weighted muds and is not normally recommended for barite recovery. Derrick now manufactures this design
8.21
Solids Control Manual with some mechanical improvements, fully-tiled conveyor flights, and the option of variable main and back drives. With the variable drive, Derrick has been successful in using this machine as a barite-recovery unit.
Oiltools S3.0 (21 X 62), S2.1 (18 X 56)

These centrifuges are manufactured by Humbolt-Wedag in Germany under a Bird Machine Co. license. Both can provide reasonably good separation performance provided they are operated at maximum RPM in unweighted muds. Both units are fully hydraulic which helps prevent solids overloading and bowl plugging in barite recovery mode. The S2.1 is normally supplied as the barite recovery centrifuge. The quality of local service is an important consideration for these centrifuges as with all hydraulic units.
Bird Design Centrifuges - Sweco SC-4, Broadbent, Brandt CF-2, Derrick DB1
This 24 x 38 in. oilfield centrifuge was originally a Bird design. Modifications to the basic design have been made in accordance to the specific companys design concepts. Both Sweco and Broadbent build their machines in-house. Brandt purchases the centrifuge rotating assembly and skids it out in-house. These machines will have suitable separation performance above 1900 RPM. All except the Brandt have x-rayed welds to certify operation at this higher RPM. The Derrick machine has a longer bowl (24 x 45 in.) and will perform best in unweighted muds. Gearbox ratio and conveyor flight design vary significantly. The Sweco and Broadbent machines have 60:1 gearbox ratios and double-lead conveyors that provide good performance in barite recovery operations. The Brandt CF-2 has a widely-spaced, single-lead conveyor with a 140:1 gearbox more suited to unweighted mud. The optional hydraulics package offered by Sweco is recommended when the SC-4 is used as the high-g centrifuge in two-stage operations. It will provide a slightly higher bowl RPM and adjustable differential RPM to maximize separation performance.
Alpha-Laval 414, Swaco 414 (14 X 38), Sharples P3000, Hutcheson Hayes HH1430 (14 X 30)
These machines have the same features as their longer-bowled counterparts. The shorter bowl length reduces retention time and makes these centrifuges less susceptible to high torque in barite recovery applications. The larger machines are recommended for unweighted mud applications.
8.22
Summary
With the emphasis on reduced waste volumes and improved solids removal efficiency, the centrifuge has become an integral part of the drilling solids removal system. Centrifuges are capable of removing very fine solids that cannot be removed by any other mechanical solid removal device. The solids discharge is relatively dry. Laboratory tests indicate that centrifuge performance is chiefly a function of G-force, pond depth, bowl-conveyor differential rpm and mud viscosity. G-force, a function of bowl rpm and diameter has the greatest impact on separation efficiency. Pond depth controls both fluid residence time and flow capacity. Differential rpm is a factor in solids conveyance and torque limitations. Increasing yield values detrimentally affect separation efficiency. Once a minimum threshold G-force is reached, cake dryness is relatively unaffected by G-force. However, a minor difference in dryness may change the appearance of the solids from runny to stackable. Large, high G-force machines are recommended for centrifuging unweighted muds. Use deep pond depths and lower flow rates for fine solids distributions. Coarse solids distributions may be more efficiently processed using shallow pond depths and higher flow rates. Centrifuging hydrocyclone underflows becomes increasingly economic as mud formulation and waste disposal costs increase. The centrifuge should process in excess of the hydrocyclone underflow rate. Two designs for centrifuge catch tanks are shown. A low-G, high capacity centrifuge is recommended for these coarse solids. The centrifuge is used in weighted mud to recover valuable weighting material from mud which must be discharged due to unacceptable colloidal solids content. The economics of barite-recovery centrifuging is usually positive when the liquid phase is inexpensive and disposal costs are not prohibitive. G-force should be maximized to improve barite recovery. Two-stage centrifuging is necessary in weighted muds when liquid discharge must be minimized. The first centrifuge recovers barite. Its effluent is fed to a second centrifuge operating a maximum Gs, which discards solids and returns the liquid phase. Colloidal solids are not removed. The economics of two-stage centrifuging are site-dependent. A method for monitoring the cost effectiveness of two-stage centrifuging is presented in this section. Recommended features on a centrifuge include: 1) Accelerator for the feed, 2) tungsten carbide feed port entries and conveyor tiles, 3) universally adjustable pond dams, and 4) stainless steel bowl and conveyor. However, quality of service is paramount. Recommended centrifuges for both unweighted and weighted muds are listed.
8.23
8.24
Chapter 9. Centrifugal Pumps & Piping
Centrifugal pumps are ideal for the low pressure, high flow rate requirements of hydrocyclones and mixing systems. Unlike constant-volume piston pumps, centrifugal pumps provide constant head. Consequently, the pump and associated piping system must be correctly sized and designed to deliver the required flow rate and desired head. This section briefly describes how centrifugal pumps work and provides guidelines for the design, installation and operation of centrifugal pumps and piping systems.
The centrifugal pump consists of a rotating impeller mounted inside a casing (Figure 9.1). Fluid enters the casing at the center (the eye of the impeller). As the impeller spins, the fluid is accelerated to the circumference by the curved impeller vanes. The accelerated fluid exits the impeller and enters the pump casing where this kinetic energy is converted into pressure energy. Although the pump can operate against a closed discharge valve, it is not recommended. When there is no flow, all the pump power is dissipated into the fluid. This will cause the pump and motor to quickly overheat. A drive shaft connected to the impeller transmits power from the driver. A stuffing box or seal is normally used to prevent leakage. The most common driver for centrifugal pumps is the a.c., fixed-speed, induction motor. Variable-speed motors are available, but rarely required for drilling rig applications. The motor is joined to the pump shaft by a flexible coupling. Drivers are usually three-phase motors. The rotation of the pump should be checked when it is installed to make sure that it is rotating in the proper direction. Centrifugal pumps are usually constructed of a cast-steel housing with cast-iron internal parts. Long-life packages offer hard-facing on the high-wear areas of the pump. Wear-resistant tungsten carbide seals are also available. Both are highly recommended. The pump performance curves in Appendix D, Pump Performance Curves, illustrate that the head generated by centrifugal pumps decreases very little as the flow rate is increased. Conversely, the flow rate through hydrocyclones is not affected much by head. Note, however, that hydrocyclones are designed to operate at a certain amount of head. Less or more may be detrimental to their performance. Therefore, the pump should be sized to provide the correct head at the flow rate dictated by the hydrocyclones.
9.1
Figure 9.1
Typical Centrifugal Pump. Kinetic energy is converted into pressure energy by the rotating impeller vanes to provide consistent head.
Sizing Centrifugal Pumps

1. Determine the total flow rate needed. For a hydrocyclone manifold, the flow rate is calculated by: Q (gpm) = # of Cones Flow Capacity Cone 2. Determine the total head required. For most hydrocyclones, the required inlet head is 75 ft. The total head required from the pump is: H t = 75 ft + Lift Height (ft) + Friction Losses (ft) where:
9.2
Centrifugal Pumps & Piping Lift Height is the height between the hydrocyclone manifold and the mud surface (not the pump suction). Friction Losses are the equivalent loss of head through lines, elbows and tees. For most installations, this is generally between 2 and 5 ft. If long line lengths and/or numerous elbows and tees are present, use a worksheet as shown in Table 9.1 to calculate the actual friction losses. An example calculation is provided. 3. Using the pump performance curve for your pump (Appendix D, Pump Performance Curves), find the intersection of the total flow rate required (Step 1) and the total head required (Step 2). Choose the impeller size which corresponds to this point. If the intersection point falls between impeller sizes, choose the next larger impeller size. 4. Determine the required horsepower to drive the pump. Using the pump performance diagram for your pump, find the intersection point for the impeller size determined in Step 3 and the total flow rate (Step 1). Read the corresponding horsepower required at this point. Interpolate between the horsepower curves when necessary. This is the horsepower required to pump water. For any mud weight, the required brake horsepower (BHP) is calculated by: mud ( ppg ) BHP curve BHP mud = -------------------------------------------------------------8.34
Centrifugal Pump Sizing Example

Problem: Determine the pump requirements, given the following desilter arrangement: 12-50 gpm cones Required head - 75 ft Maximum Mud Density - 10 ppg Piping System as shown in Figure 9.2 Solution: 1. Calculate Total Flow Rate gpm Q = 12 cones 50 ------------- = 600 gpm cone
9.3
Figure 9.2
Centrifugal Pump Sizing Example.
2. Calculate the pump discharge head: A. Using a worksheet such as Table 9.1, list the length and size of each pipe, and the number and size of each fitting. B. From Table 9.2, find the friction loss coefficients (C) for each item listed. C. Calculate the friction loss for each item. D. Sum the friction losses to arrive at the total friction losses. E. The total required head is the sum of the required hydrocyclone head, the feet of lift and the friction losses. 3. From the Pump Performance Curves (Appendix D, Pump Performance Curves), select a pump which will provide the required head and flow rate. For this example, a Harrisburg Series 250 6 x 5 x 14 pump operating at 1150 rpm with a 14 in. impeller will provide 95 ft of head at 600 gpm. 4. Determine the Horsepower required. At 95 ft of head and 600 gpm, this pump will require 25 HP to pump water. Correcting for 10 ppg mud:
9.4
Centrifugal Pumps & Piping
mud ( ppg ) BHP curve BHP mud = ------------------------------------------------------------8.34 ( 10 ) (25) = ----------------------8.34

= 30 HP
Table 9.1 Detailed Worksheet for Pump Sizing Equipment Information

Required Flow Rate Required Hydrocyclone Head Feet of Lift
Q (gpm) HH (ft) HL (ft)
= = =
600 75
Tabulation of Friction Losses N is the length of pipe (ft) or number of Fittings
Pipe Length or Fitting Type
Size (in.) 6
N C QR ----------------------------6 1 10 ( 1 ) ( 0.664 ) ( 600 ) ------------------------------------------6 1 10

2
Friction Loss (ft)
Extended Entrance
.02
10
Suction Line
( 10 ) ( 0.0664 ) ( 600 ) ------------------------------------------------6 1 10 ( 15 ) ( 0.1612 ) ( 600 ) ------------------------------------------------6 1 10 ( 2 ) ( 1.29 ) ( 600 ) ---------------------------------------6 1 10

2 2
.24
15
Discharge Line
.87
Short Elbows
.93
Total Friction Loss, HF (ft) Total Required Head, HT (ft) HH + HL + HT = HT 75 + 6 + 2 = 83 ft
2.06
9.5
Table 9.2 Friction Loss Coefficients for Pipe Fittings2

Nominal Pipe Size Actual Inside Diameter (Inches) Std Wt Straight Pipe1 Welding Ell 90 Standard Weight Short Long Ell Threaded Standard Tee Threaded 90 Ell Threaded Square Ell Butterfly Valve FULLY OPEN Swing Check Valve FULLY OPEN Globe Valve FULLY OPEN Long
Gate Valve FULLY OPEN
R =1 D
R = 1.5 D
45Ell Threaded
Square Entrance
Reduced Tee Threaded
Standard Tee Threaded
For 45 Ells Use 65% of Values Given Below
9.6
Cone Entrance
1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 .622 .824 1.049 1.380 1.610 2.067 2.467 3.068 4.026 5.047 6.065 7.981 10.020 12.000 10,048 2,300 628 147 67 18.7 7.3 2.3 .5485 .1612 .0664 .0156 .0047 .0019 4,019 920 377 103 61 18.7 7.3 4.6 1.10 .48 .20 .062 .024 .011 8,034 2,300 879 264 148 56 22 9.1 2.74 1.13 .53 .172 .061 .030 11,053 3,220 1,130 338 182 74.7 29.4 11.4 3.84 1.29 .66 .203 .080 .038
Extended Entrance
17,082 4,830 1,632 514 276 93 44 18.3 5.49 2.10 1.00 .312 .118 .057
33,158 96,600 3,326 1,028 546 187 88 34 10.97 4.03 1.99 .624 .235 .114
205 81 18.3 4.94 1.13 .73 .203 .075 .042
50,240 16,100 5,020 1,616 877 280 140 53 17.6 6.45 3.19 .515 .197 .095
190,912 52,900 18,198 5,729 3,035 1,083 507 196 62.0 22.9 11.3 3.49 1.32 .64
56 29 11 3.84 1.29 .66 .203 .061 .038
37 22 7 2.19 .81 .40 .125 .039 .023
1. Based on pipe friction factor, f = .047. For other function factors, C = [31,088 f/d5] * L where L has units of feet and d has units of inches. 2. Adapted from IADC Mud Equipment Manual, Handbook 4, Centrifugal Pumps and Piping Systems.
Estimating Impeller Size

In many instances, we are dealing with existing equipment and need to determine the pump impeller size to estimate output capacity. The impeller size of a centrifugal pump can be estimated by the following procedure: 1. The fluid density, pump rpm, a valve on the pump discharge and an accurate pressure gauge between the pump and valve are required. 2. With the pump running, close the discharge valve and read the pressure. Note: Limit time to less than 3 minutes. 3. Convert pressure read in Step 2 to head (feet). 4. Plot the head from Step 3 on the pump performance curve for 0 gpm. Estimate the effective impeller size.
Pipe Sizing
As was evident in the centrifugal pump sizing example, the pipe diameter and the design of the piping system will affect the size of the pump and the horsepower requirements. Suction and discharge lines should be as short as practical and sized to flow at velocities in the range of 5 to 10 ft/s. Low velocities will allow solids to drop out in the lines. High velocities erode elbows and cause distribution problems in the hydrocyclone manifold. Inadequate suction line size can cause cavitation in the pump. Also, the suction line should have no elbows, tees or reducers within 3 pipe diameters of the pump suction flange. Pipe velocity can be calculated using the following equation: Q v ( ft s ) = --------------------------2 ( 2.48 ) d i where: Q = flow rate, in gal/min di = inside diameter of the pipe, in inches As a quick reference, the maximum and minimum recommended flow rates for common pipe diameters are listed in Table 9.3.
Suction Head Requirements (NPSH)

The suction line of the pump must be submerged to prevent vortexes in the suction tank or air locking of the pump. Centrifugal pumps require a net positive suc-
9.7
Solids Control Manual Table 9.3 Recommended Flow Rates for Pipe Nominal Pipe Diameter Schedule 40
3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 5 6 8 10 12
Recommended Flow Rates, gpm Minimum @ 4 ft/s

7 12 20 26 45 60 95 130 160 260 360 650 1000 1400
Maximum @ 10 ft/s
16 26 47 63 105 150 230 310 400 625 900 1550 2550 3500
tion head (NPSH) to prevent cavitation and subsequent damage to the pump. The NPSH required is a function of the pump design and the flow rate. NPSH curves are included on the Centrifugal Pump Performance figures to find the minimum NPSH needed. The amount of NPSH available must then be determined. As a shortcut, the minimum submergence for 6 in. and 8 in. suction lines as a function of flow rate is provided in Figure 9.3. These curves may be used for most applications where the suction line is short and straight. If the intersection of your submergence depth and flow rate fall near the line, a detailed determination of suction head should be made using the following equation: P atm P vapor Vs NSPH ( ft ) = --------------------------- + dsubmergence -------------------------- ------ H fs 0.052 m 0.052 m 2 g where: Patm dsubmergence Pvapor = = = uncorrected barometric pressure, psi (Figure 9.4) height from pump suction to fluid level, ft vapor pressure of liquid, psi (Figure 9.5)
2
9.8
Figure 9.3
Minimum Suction Line Submergence. Points below or right of the lines should be avoided.
pm vs g Hfs
= = = =
mud density, lb/gal velocity of suction line fluid, ft/s gravitational constant = 32 ft/s2 friction head losses in the suction line, ft
NPSH Example
From the previous example, the required NPSH from the Pump Performance Curves for our flowrate and impeller size is approximately 4.5 ft. Head loss in the suction line were calculated in the worksheet example to be 0.26 ft. If the rig elevation is 1000 ft and the mud circulating temperature is 100oF., the available NPSH is determined as follows: 1. Patm = 14.2 psia (from Figure 9.4) 2. dsubmergence = 6 ft 3. Pvapor = 0.95 psia (from Figure 9.5)
9.9
4.
400 Q v = --------------------------- = -------------------------------- = 4.38 ft/s 2 2 ( 2.48 ) d i 2.48 6.056
5. The available NPSH is:

0.95 14.2 ( 4.38 ) NPSH ( ft ) = ------------------------- + 6 ---------------------- ------------------- 0.64 = 30.54 ft 0.052 10 0.05 10 2 32.4
2
Since only 4.5 ft is required, there is sufficient NPSH available.
Suction Line Entrance

A properly-designed entrance will minimize friction loss, reduce air entrainment and will reduce the amount of dead volume before suction is lost. Various designs are compared in Figure 9.6.
Installation and Operating Guidelines

1. Eliminate manifolding wherever possible. 2. Keep air out of the mud by degassing, having adequate suction line submergence and installing baffles to break vortices. 3. Do not restrict flow on the suction side of centrifugal pumps. 4. Install a pressure or head gauge between the pump and the first valve. 5. Do not completely close off discharge for more than 3 minutes. 6. Suction and discharge lines should be as short and straight as practical. 7. Size lines to achieve velocities of 5 - 10 feet per second. 8. Install pumps to run with flooded suctions. Check NPSH. 9. Check direction of rotation. 10. To reduce start up load on the electric motor, start the pump with the discharge valve partially open, then open fully once the pump is up to speed. This will also reduce shock loading on the downstream equipment.
9.10
Figure 9.4
Elevation vs. Barometric Pressure.
Fluid Temperature, F
Figure 9.5
Vapor Pressure as a Function of Fluid Temperature.
9.11
Figure 9.6
Pump Suction Pipe Entrances. The recommended designs reduce friction loss and air entrainment.
9.12
Summary
A centrifugal pump provides constant head, which is ideal for the low pressure, high flow rate requirements of hydrocyclones and mixing systems. Centrifugal pumps are constructed of a cast-steel housing with cast-iron internal parts. Hardfacing on the high-wear areas and tungsten carbide seals are recommended. Centrifugal pumps must be sized to provide the required head. Charts of head versus flow rate for the most common centrifugal pumps supplied in Appendix D, Pump Performance Curves. A procedure to correctly size centrifugal pumps is outlined in this section. Suction and discharge piping should be short as possible to reduce friction losses. The piping should be sized to flow at velocities in the range of 5 to 10 ft/s to prevent solids settling or erosion problems. Tables and charts are supplied to estimate the friction losses in pipe and fittings. The suction line of the pump must be submerged to prevent vortexes in the suction and subsequent air locking of the pump. Guidelines are presented for determination of minimum submergence depth. Designs for suction line entrances are also illustrated.
9.13
9.14
References
1. Young, G. A. 1983. Handbook for Successful Solids Control, Amoco Production Company, 1st Edition. 2. Stone, V. D. Low-Silt Mud Increases Gulfs Drilling Efficiency, Cuts Costs, Oil and Gas Journal, V. 62, No. 41, October 12, 1964. 3. Lal, M. Economic and Performance Analysis Models for Solids Control, SPE Paper 18037 presented at the Annual Technical Conference in Houston, TX, October 2-5, 1988. 4. Lal, M. and Hoberock, L. L. Solids Conveyance Dynamics and Shaker Performance, SPE Paper 14389 (1985). 5. Cagle, W. S. and Wilder, L. B. 1978. Layered Shale Shaker Screens Improve Mud Solids Control, World Oil, April 1978. 6. Hoberock, L. L. 1990. Fluid Conductance and Separation Characteristics of Oilfield Screen Cloths, Paper presented at the American Filtration Society National Fall Meeting, Lafayette, 1990. 7. Cutt, A. R. 1992. Shaker Screen Selection, Amoco Production Company, Research Report F92-P-57 (92352ART0114). 8. Cutt, A. R. Shaker Screen Characterization Through Image Analysis, SPE Paper 22570 (1991). 9. API Recommended Practice 13E (RP13E) Third Edition, May 1, 1993. Recommended Practice for Shale Shaker Screen Cloth Designation. 10. Hoberock, L. L. 1982. Shale-Shaker Selection & Operation, Reprint Series from Oil & Gas Journal, Pennwell Publishing Company. 11. Bray, R. P. 1984. An Experimental Evaluation of Oilfield Degassers, Amoco Production Company, Research Report F84-P-12 (83269ART0053). 12. Young, G. A. 1987. An Experimental Investigation of the Performance of a Three Inch Hydrocyclone, SPE Paper 143899, presented at the IADC/SPE Drilling Conference, March 1987.
Ref.1
13. IADC Mud Equipment Manual, Handbook 6: Hydrocyclones, Handbook 4: Centrifugal Pumps and Piping, Gulf Publishing Company, 1982. 14. Thurber, N. E. 1988. The Impact of Centrifuge Selection and Operation on Drilling Economics, Amoco Production Company, Research Report F88-P-43 (88126ART0171). 15. Young, G. A. 1984. Economic Analysis of Dual Stage Centrifuging, Amoco Production Company, Internal Report, 84067ART0102. 16. MacDonald, J. G. 1982. Mud Mixing Hopper Evaluation: Geosource Sidewinder 400 and Mission Venturi, Amoco Production Company, Research Report F82-P-37 (82202ART0148). 17. Lal, M. and Thurber, N. E. Drilling Waste Management and Closed Loop Systems, paper presented at the 1988 International Conference on Drilling Wastes, April 5-8, 1988, Calgary, Canada. 18. Young, G. and Robinson, L. H. How to Design a Mud System for Optimum Solids Removal, World Oil, September-November 1982. 19. Young, G. A. 1982. Mud Equipment Manual, Mud System Arrangement, Amoco Production Company, Research Report F82-P-28 (82144ART0017). 20. Love, W. W. Engineered Sizing of Mud Agitators Works Well, Oil and Gas Journal, November 28, 1977. 21. API Bulletin 13C (RP13C) Bulletin on Drilling Fluids Processing Equipment. 22. EPA, 1983. Hazardous Waste Land Treatment. EPA/530-SW-874, 671 p. 23. Malachosky, E. et al. Offshore Disposal of Oil-Base Drilling Fluid Waste: An Environmentally Acceptable Solution, SPE Paper 23373 (1991). 24. Moschovidis, Z. A. et al. Disposal of Oily Cuttings by Downhole Fracture Injection - Part 1: Field Testing and Data Interpretation, APR Greenback. 25. Williams, M. P. Solids Control for the Man on the Rig, Petroleum Engineer International, October-December 1982. 26. Svarovsky, L. 1981. Solid-Liquid Separation, (Chemical Engineering Series), Butterworth & Co. (Publishers) Ltd., London. 27. Advanced Drilling Fluids Training Manual, Volume II, Amoco Production Company, 1988.
Ref.2

Oil - Solid Controls PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Oil - Solid Controls PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Appendix A.

The wire surface area to volume ratio, A, is computed by:

Appendix B. Solids Control Equipment Discharge Analysis, Oil-Based Muds

Solids Control Manual

Alternate Retort Procedure for Air-Entrained Cuttings Samples

9. Weight of dry solids (including salt), gm: W ds = W4 - W1

10. Volume of oil added by syringe, cm3:

Solids Control Equipment Discharge

11. Corrected oil on cuttings Volume, cm3: Vo = Vto - Voa

12. Corrected retort Volume, cm3: Vt = 50 ml - Voa

Solids Analysis Calculations

2. Weight of oil, gm: Wo = Vo * SGoil

3. Volume of brine, cm3: Vb = 100 (Vw)/(b(100 - %S))

4. Corrected dry solids Volume, cm3: Vs = (Vt - Vo - Vb)

5. Corrected dry solids weight, gm: Ws = (Wws - Wo - (Vb * b)

6. Dry solids density, gm/cm3:

7. Corrected Volume% solids: %Vs = 100 * Vs/Vt

8. Volume% high-density solids (% of wet slurry):

11. Low-density solids concentration, lb/bbl: LGS = 3.5 (SGLGS) (%LGS)

12. Weight% oil to dry solids: %Oil = (Wo/Ws) * 100

13. Total discharge rate, bbl/hr: Qt = (60) (ms)/((350) (ws))

14. Solid discharge rate, bbl/hr: Qs = (%Vs) (Qt)/100

15. Liquid discharge rate, bbl/hr: Ql = Q t - Qs

Solids Control Equipment Discharge

1.24 26.7 100.0 75.0 2.65 4.2

Solids Control Manual

= Wws / Vt = 94.5 / 50.0 = 1.89 gm/cm3

= Ws/Vs = 72.0/26.4 = 2.73 gm/cm3

9. Corrected Volume% solids:

Solids Control Equipment Discharge

= 100 * Vs / Vt = (100) (26.4) / (50) = 52.8%

Solids Control Manual

Appendix D. Screen Designations

Brandt BHX Series

Separation Potential D50

Flow Capacity Cond.

Solids Control Manual Advanced BHX Replacement Series

Separation Potential D50

Flow Capacity Cond.

Southwestern BHX Replacement Series

Separation Potential D50

Flow Capacity Cond.

Brandt - Retrofit Tandem, ATL-CS (Scalping Deck)

Comments: Brandt BXL Series

Separation Potential Cond. D50

Solids Control Manual

Brandt - Retrofit Tandem, ATL-CS (Scalping Deck)

Brandt BLS Series

Separation Potential Cond. D50

Brandt - Retrofit Tandem, ATL-CS (Scalping Deck)

Separation Potential D50

Flow Capacity Cond.

Solids Control Manual

Brandt - Retrofit Tandem, ATL-CS (Scalping Deck)

Broadbent - Tandem Master (Lower Deck)

Separation Potential D50

Flow Capacity Aspect Ratio Cond. Area

Solids Control Manual

Derrick - Flo-Line Cleaner, Cascade System, High G Dryer

Derrick PMD DX Series

Separation Potential D50

Flow Capacity Cond.